I
Review Module on
Architectural Desisn
TABLE OF CONTENTS
.
I
Introduction to Development Controls ..................................... 1
II
Residential Buildings .............................................................11
Ill
Educational and Recreational Facilitles ....·............... A ............. 48
IV
Mercantile Establishments.................................................... 79
V
Business Faclltties ................................................................106
VI
Institutional Buildings.... : ...................................................... 127
VII
Assembly Structures............................................................157
VIII
Transportation Facilities ............................................................ 179
IX
References ....................................... ·,• ................................208
Chaf?ter 1:
INTRODUCTION TO
DEVELOPMENT CONTROLS
~
Module on Archri.ctural Deelgn
Chapter 1 : INTRODUCTION TO DEVELOPMENT CONTROLS
I.
DEVHOPMENT CONTROLS
different types of occupancies. Minimum setbacks for residential
buildings are shown in Table Vlll.2 of PD 1096 while the minimum
There are various limitations present in a construction project. One of
setbacks for commercial, industrial, institutional, and recreational
the majo r lim itations is what we call the "Development Con olsN which
buildings are shown in Table Vlll.3.
are mainly discussed in Rules VII & VIII of the National Building Code of
For corner and through lots, the minimum front setback
t he Philippines (PD 1096). Development Controls or "DC" is defined as
shall be applied on all sides of the property facing the street or
the set of inter-acting regulations C8flteming the physic;al utilization of a
the Road Right of Way (RROW).
lot and governing the planningldesign of spaces and/or the-use or
occuu.-•_v of a buildi
o be introduc~ on a tot.• The restrictions set by
t he development controls help define the carrying capacity and the
YARD
SETBACK
-
VAID
development potential of a particular lot.
,
A.
TOTAL LOT AREA
The Total Lat. Area (TI.AJ is the surface area of a property
y
y
A
A
•
on which a proposed building is to be constructed. If the
BUILDING
I
D
D
proposed building is erected on two or more properties, the TIA
shall be equal to the surface area of such number of lots.
YARD
8. SETBAO<AND YARD
The setback is th horizontal distance measured 90• from
oineriiiosrfcice of the bui1ding to the property lines. Though
directly relate to each other, the setback should not be confused
with the yard. The "setback", which is a distance expressed in
meters, _ __ __ of the • rdu, which is an area
expressed in square meters. The yard is the area of required open
space within the lot which is essential to allow the flow of light
and ventJlation inside the building. Section 804 of Rule VIII of the
'
YARD
SETBACK
Figure 1-1: Setbacks and Yards
C.
PERCENTAGE OF SITE OCCUPANCY
The Percen1ilge of Site Oa:upancy (PSO) is the percentage
of the maximum aUowabte endosecS
or are
any building in
relation to the Total Lot A'Tea. It can be calculated by dividing the
area of the building foot print by the lot area (PSO = AMBF/1\A\.
The National Building Code prescribes the maximum al\owab\e
National Building Code contains the minimum setbacks for
~ Module on Architectural Design
cdep
,
J
Chapter 1 : INTRODUCTION TO DEVELOPMENT CONTROLS
P O fore ch
of
lot . It can be found on Tables Vll.1 and Vlll.1
I 8u1ld1ng Code. Aside from the setbacks, the
imu
ble PSO Is also used to determine the allowable
buildinji. footprint.
D. AU..OWABLE MAXIMUM BUILDING FOOTPRINT
e allowable maximum building footprint (AMBF) is the
d'I:
urn oort1on of the lot that may be occupied by the building
a• grJde le el after satisfying set back, yard and court
req 1rements. The area of the AMBF is measured from the
o ,ermost face of the exterior walls of t he proposed building. It is
e area on which a fully enclosed building can be erected.
Ba sically, there are two ways to compute for the AMBF:
1.
First is by determining the maximum PSO and using the
formu la AMBF=PSO x TLA.
2.
Second is by applying the setbacks in order to define the
Table 1-1: Building Height Limit taken from Table Vll.2 of PD 1096
Type of Buildlng/
Structure
Residential 1,
Residential 2 (Basic),
Residential 3 (Basic),
Residential 4
Residential 2
(Maximum)
Residential 3
(Maximum)
Residential 5
Commercial 1
Commercial 2
Commercial 3
Industrial 1
Industrial 2
boundaries of the building foot print. The formula may be
expressed as AMBF
= TlA - Yat'd Areas. Aside from the
Industrial 3
setbacks, the maximum length of firewalls shall also be
considered especially for residential developments.
E.
BUtlDtNG HEIGHT LIMIT
The Building Height Li mit (BHL) is "the maximum height
to be allowed for buildings based on their proposed use or
occupancy." The BHL shall be generally the distance between the
established grade line and the topmost portion of the building.
Cultural
Institutional
Utility/Transportation/
RROW/Services
Parks and Open
Recreational &
Entertainment Spaces
Agricultural/ AgroIndustrial/Tourism
BHL
(no. of floors*)
3
BHL
(meters)
10
5
15
12
36
36-54
12-18
3-5
10-15
18
6
16- 60
48 - 180
15 m but not exceed the duly approved
BHL in the major zone it is part of
21 m but not exceed the duly approved
BHL in the major zone it is part of
27 m but not exceed the duly approved
BHL in the major zone it is part of
30 m but not exceed the duly approved
BHL in the major zone it is part of
titl
~
15 m but not exceed the duly approved
BHL in the major zone it is part of
Review Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 1 : INTRODUCTION TO DEVELOPMENT CONTROLS
Type of Building/
Structure
P'anned
1t
Deve opme t (PUD) a
a red a ation area
c ose to a·rport
PUD at a r eclamat ion
BHL
(no. of floors•)
3-30
BHL
(meters)
10-45
(with ATO
prescribed BHL as
needed)
10-30
16-45
48-135
3-25
10-75
(with ATO
prescribed BHL as
needed)
3-15
IASICNJSM
aHl NOJKTION
l'ltOMAMU
I
i
area
P
at a red am at ion
area
eryciosetoa,,
ope-ati g airport
·-
Figure 1-2: Initial Allowable Maximum Volume of Building
511ye.,_.,.P1ane
• assuming that the floor to floor height is 3 meters
F.
dictMf"9 8uildi"9 5etNCk
at higher noon
AUOWABLE MAXIMUM VOWME OF BUILDING
Tre Allowable Maximum Vo lume of Building (AMVB) is
"the limit of
1 cing
r
e total volume of space that can be occupied by a
abcve grade level. " While the AM BF is expressed in
""I
\
Probaltle lluildl"9
Fonn after ap.,ayi119
on
.iare m eters, the AMVB is expressed in cubic meters. There are
two types of AMVB: the initial and t he final. he initial AMVB,
caHed
foo print prism, can be computed by multiplying
the Alowable M aximum Building Footprint by the Building Heigtit
limit (BHL) expressed" n meters. The final AMVB on the other
hand is equal to t he initial AMVB m inus the volume of the~ _...
-building above t tie angular plane t o sati
light and ventHation.
Figure 1-3: Final Allowable Maximum Volume of Building
Review Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 1 : INTRODUCTION TO DEVELOPMENT CONTROLS
G. INCAEMENTAi SETUCk
t,ll .
. ,,
can be extrapolated. In May 2007, t he Professional Regulatory
1
·ili
Board of Architecture (PRBOA) has issued an expandeii
d fined as "the horizontal
interpretation of the angles for R-2, R-3, R-4, R-5, C-1, and C-2
ut~rmo t bwldmg/lme of a lower floor
r floor, wherein the outermost building line of
developments. This document can be downloaded from the
official website of PRBOA.
rther from the property line."
INCREMENTAL
SETBACK
The angles/slopes are either expressed in degrees or in
ratio form . The ratio is in "rise Is to run" format. The incremental
setbacks may be determined graphically by drawing the angle or
slope from the centerline ofthe RROW up to the building or
YARD
S~TBACK
structure. (Refer to Figure VIII.G.13 of PD 1096 for illustration).
.,
'
The incremental setback may also be calculated
mat
ematicaOy. The horizontal distance from the centerline of
RROW at any given floor of the building affected by the
.
•
•
angle/slope must first be determined. This can be computed by
using the tangent function (where tan 0 = opposite/adjacent) for
the angle in degrees, or the proportioning method for the ratio of
PROPERTY EDGE
slope. The difference between the horizontal distance of the
higher floor and that of the lower floor will give you the
Figure 1-4: Incremental Setback
incremental setback.
Table VII.G.3 of PD 1096 presents the angles/slopes to
satisfy natural light and ventilation requirements which prescribe
the incremental setbacks for the front side of the building. The
th
the floor to floor height is 3 meters. (Refer to Figure Vlll.20 of PD
or vertex of the angle. However, only the
ang1es/ slopes for R-1 and C-3 developments are shown.
setback of 0.3 meters for the rear and sides of the building which
starts from the 3"' floor up to the 14 floor. This is assuming that
centerline of the Road Right of Way (RROW) serves as the
,arence
ForC•3 buildings, there is a prescribed incremental
.
1096 for illustration).
According to the code, the angles/slopes for other occupancies
Review Module on Architectural Design
ti
·'J
Chapter 1 : INTRODUCTION TO DEVELOPMENT CONTROLS
Table 1-2: Floor to Lot Area Ratio taken from Table V/1.G.1 of PD 1096
H. GROSS FLOOR AREA
The 1ross floor area is defined as "the total floor space within
e perimeter of the permanent external building walls (inclusive
of main and a tliary buildings) such as office areas, residential
areas, corridors, lobbies, and mezzanine levels." The GFA shall
EXCLUDE the following areas:
1
2.
Parkins areas. dri'tleways, services, and utilities
Vertical penetrations
3.
Uncovered areas for heftpads, air-conditioning cooling
owers, air cooled condensing unit balconies, overhead water
tanks, roof decks, laund!'v areas and cages, wading or
swimming pools, whi rlpools or jacuzzis, b!rraces, gardens,
courts or plazas, balconies more than 10 square meters in
area, fire escape stnJctures and the like.
The maximum gross floor area for a development may be
determined by multiplying the Total Lot Area by the Floor to Lot
Area Ratio (GFA = TlA x FLAR).
I.
FlOOR TO LOT AREA RATIO (FLAR)
The Floor to Lot Area Ratio, also called the Floor Area
Ratio (FAR), is defined as "the ratio between the Gross Floor Area
FLAR Designation/Rights
1.5
1.3- 1.5
2.1-3.0
1.8 - 2.1
7.1-8.1
1.6-1.8
6.0-9.0
1.7-3.0
3.6-9.0
9.0-34.0
1.5-2.5
2.5-3.0
3.0-5.0
2.5
3.5
2.0-3.0
0.5-1.0
1.8-2.2
6.0
r
of a building and the Total Lot Area of the lot on which it stands."
The formula to get the FLAR is FLAR = GFA/TLA. Table VII.G.1 of
PD 1096 Rule VII prescribes the maximum FLAR that can be
applied for a particular type of building.
Type of Building/Structure
Residential 1
Residential 2 (Basic)
Residential 2f(Maximum)
Residential 3 (Basic)
Residential 3 {Maximum)
Residential 4- ~
Residential 5
Commercial 1
Commercial 2
Commercial 3
Industrial 1
Industrial 2
Industrial 3
Institutional
Cultural
Utility/Transportation/Services/
Road Right of Way (RROW)
Parks and Open Spaces
Agricultural/Agro-Industrial/
Tourism
Planned Unit Development
(PUD) at a reclamation area
---close-to-airport
PUD at a reclamation area
PUD at an'inland area very
f lose to an operating airport
PUD at an Inland area
Cemetery
I
6.0-18.0
9.0-34.0
9.0-34.0
0.8
Review Module on Architectural Design
'
Chapter 1 : INTRODUCTION TO DEVELOPMENT CONTROLS
J.
TOTAL GROSS FLOOR AREA
2.
Use the formula TGFA = GFA x Multlpller
The total gross floor area is defined as "the total floor space
In order to use this method, the maximum Gross Floor
the main and auxiliary buildings primarily consisting of the
GFA and all other enclosed support areas together with all other
maximum GFA has been determinecl, refer to Table VII.G.2 to
usable horizontal areas/surfaces above and below established
get the "multiplier to convert GFA to TGFA."
Wit ·
Area (GFA) of the building must be calculatea first. After the
grade level that are physically attached to the building which shall
consists of the following: parking area and driveways, services,
Table 1-3:
and utilities. The actual TGFA of a building may be determined by
using the formula given below:
of PD1096
TGFA = GFA + Non-GFA areas -
Type of Building/Structure
nd Incremental
on all floors
Residential 1
Residential ~Basic),
Residential 3 Basic), and
Residential 4
Residential 2((Maximum),
Residential l(Maxi111um),
and Residen !al 5
Commercial 1
Commercial 2
Commercial 3
Industrial 1
Industrial 2 and 3
Transportation, Utility and
Service Areas
Agricultural and Agroindustrial
There are three ways to compute for the maximum Total
Gross Floor Area:
1.
Refer to Table Vll.1 of PD 1096 to get the formula.
The format of the formulas given in Table Vll.1 is TGFA =
BHL x PSO x TlA. Note that the BHL indicated in the formula
is in terms of the maximum number of floors of the building
not in meters. There are three things that must be identified
in order to get the applicable formula:
a. The zone of the lot (R-1, R-2, C-1, etc.)
b. The type of the lot (inside lot, corner lot, etc.)
c.
Whether the building is with firewall or without
firewall
3.
Multiplier to Convert
GFAtoTGFA
1.5
1.25
1.20
1.25
1.33
1.50
1.33
1.50
1.50
1.03-1.06
Use the formula TGFA = BHL x AMBF and deduct the areas
affected by varying setbacks arupper floor , incrementa\
setbacks, and firewall height limitations.
Review Module on Archltectura\ Design
Chapter 1 : INTRODUCTION TO DEVELOPMENT CONTROLS
K. TOTAL OPEN SPACE WITHIN LOT
equal to the sum of the rear yard and the side yards of the
The Total Open Space within lot (TOSL) is defined as "the
property.
total open space required for each type of use/ occupancy for a
lot expressed as a percentase of the total lot area." It may
M. UNPAVED SURFACEAREA
be calculated by subtract ing the Percentage of Site Occupancy
from the Total Lot Area (TOSL =
-PSO). The percentage of
t hall be reserved for softscaping,'plantins.H Unlike the ISA,
TOSL in relation to the Total Lot Area can also be found on Table
the USA is an open space that permits water infiltration into the
VIII l of PO 1096.
soil. While the Code limits the ISA within the lot, it encourages
There are two types of open spaces within the lot:
impervious surface ar
(~) and unpaved surface ar
(USA).
TOSl may also be expressed as the combination of these two
L
The unpaved surface area (USA) is "the portion of the lot
the increase in ISA to promote the environmental function of the
yard.
The minimum values for USA are prescribed by the Table
open spaces (TOSL = ISA + USA).
Vm.1 of PD 1096. In case, the actual TOSL becomes larger than
what is prescribed in Tablt!'Vlll.1, excess open areas should be
IMPERVIOUS SURFACE AREA
The m pervious surface area (ISA) is defined as "the
added to the USA. For R-1 developments, the USA shall be equal
to the front yard of the property.
percentage of t he maximum allowabte floor area of any paved,
tiled,
hardscaped surface at the ground floor/grade level
outside the building in relation to the Total Lot Area." It may also
mean the open spaces within the lot that do not allow water to
N. MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CONSTRUCTION AREA
e Ma, mum Allowable Construction Area (MACA)
determines the area within the lot that can oe aved, regardless
whether it is e'nclosed by a wall or not. It is defined in the Code as
infiltrate into the soil.
Table Vlll.1 of PD 1096 prescribes the maximum ISA that
.,fie combined total of the Maximum Allowable Percentage of
may be allowed for a particular building type. Since the ISA in
Site Occupancy and the Maximum Allowable Impervious Surface
Table Vlll.1 is already the maximum, it shall not be in any case
Area expressed as a percentage of the Total Lot Area (MACA =
increased even if the actual TOSL is larger than what was
PSO+ ISA)."
I
indicated in the table. For R-1 development , the ISA shall be
Review Module on Archltsctural Design
l
Chapter 1 : INTRODUCTION TO DEVELOPMENT CON TROLS
,
Use max. allowable PSO
found in Table Vll.1.
.....
,,-
Use max. allowable PSO
found in Table Vlll.1.
.....
....
,,-
I
AM BF
1-
Use the formula
AMBF = PSO x TLA.
Apply the minimum
....
.,,
-
required setbacks to draw
Get the area of the
drawn building footprint.
,,....
the building footprint.
,,
Select the most
strinRent.
-
f
Figure 1-5: Steps in Calculating AMBFfor Buildings without Firewall
,,.....
.....
,,.
Use the formula
AMBF = PSO x TLA.
.....
.,
.,.....
I
AMBF
r
I
I
Use max. allowable PSO
.__
found in Table .Vll.1.
Use max. allowable PSO
found in Table Vlll.1 .
Choose the
lower AMBF.
-
;
~
Apply the minimum
~
required setbacks to draw
Get the area of t he drawn ,___
footprint in 1 side, 1 rear
firewall configuration.
~
'---
the building footprint.
~
Figure 1-6: Steps in Calculating AMBFfor Buildings with Firewall
Select t he more
stringent.
Get the area of the drawn
footprint in 2 sides
firewall configuration.
Choose the
higher AMBF.
-
-
Review Moc:lule on Archluctural Design
C h apter 1 : INTRODUCTION TO DEVELOPMENT CONTROLS
I
SUMMARY OF FORMULAS
Maximum TGFA
•
AMBF = PSO x TLA
I
Determ1 e the zone
Compute for the
& type o t e lot.
maximum GFA using
Know also whether
the formula GFA =
•
a
AMBF = TLA - Yard Areas or TOSL
',
'-'
e bui
Allowable Maximum Building Footprint (AMBF}
·11 hav e
ng
' ii
•
Use the formula
TGFA
PSO=AMBF
JlA
=BHL x AMBF.
•
TLAx HAR.
Allowable Maximum Volume of the Building (AMVB)
Initial AMVB = :AMB x BHL in meters
ewa I o. not.
l
Percentage of Site Occupancy (PSO)
Final AMVB = Initial AMVB-Volume above the
angular plane
, 11
' 1,
Re er to Table Vll.1
Calculate the
Deduct the areas
to get the formula
maximum TGFA using
affected by varying
for the maximum
the multiplier to
TGFA
convert GFA to TGFA.
•
Maximum Gross Floor Area (GFA)
GFA = TLA x FLAR
•
Maximum Total Gross Floor Area (TGFA)
TGFA = GFA x Multiplier
TGFA = (BHL x AMBF) -
setbacks at upper
floors, incremental
incremental set6icl<s
setbacks and firewall
height limitations.
as to be deducted by
•
Total Open Space Within lot (TOSL)
TOSl: - TLA - PSO
TOSL = ISA + USA
I
.
•
.
Select the most
•
stringent.
Unpaved Surface Area {USA)
USA =TLA- PSO - ISA
/
Maximum Allowable Construction Area l MACA)
MACA =
O+ISA
figure 1~7: Steps in Colculotlng the Mox/mum TGFA
R.!vtew Module on Architectural Design
Cha12ter 2:
RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
Review Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 2: RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
j.
A. DEFINITIONS
A residential building is a dwelling place where a person or a
group of persons lives or resides. There are different types of
restdential buildings defined in different local codes:
PD 1096 (National Building Code of the Philippines)
a. SINGLE-DETACHED - a dwelling unit cq
1tlelv
surrounded by yards
b. SINGLE-ATTACHED- a dwelling unit with one side
1.
attached to a firewall
c. DUPLEX - dwelling unit containin
~rate living
units, each of which is separated from another by a
firewall and provided with in epeMlentaccess
d.
e.
f.
living, sleeping, and cooking purposes
APARTMENT HOUSE -Any building or portion thereof,
which is designea, built, rented, leased, let or hired out to
be occupiea, or which is occupied as the home or
residence of three or more families living independently
MANSIONITT -Apartment with two evels, double
stof"eY
h.
WALKUP - Low rise apartment without a lift, where one
i.
has to wal up using the stairs _____,_,.,~
CONDOMINIUMS -Apartment witti facilities
PENTHOUSE Biggest unit in a condominium or
apartment block, usually with two levels and located
at the uppermost floor
RA 9514 (Fire Code of the Philippines)
a. Residential occupancies are those occupancies in which
sleeping accommodations are provided for normal
residential purposes, and of which includes all buildings
designed to provide sleeping accommodations.
Residential buildings, structures or facilities are treated
separately in the following groups:
•
HOTELS - includes buildings or groups of building
under the same management in which there are
moll! than flflipen (15) slee ·ng accof'llmodatlons for
hire, primarily used for
tents wflo are lod1ed
wft or without meals. Whether designated as an
apa el, co
el or pension house, these shall be
classified as hotels, because they are potentially
subject to transient occupancy.
•
DORMITORIES - includes buildings where group
sleeping accommodations are provided for persons,
not members of the same family group In one room
or in a series of closely associated rooms under joint
occupancy and single management, as in college
dormitories, convents, fraternity houses, military
barracks, and the like.
ROWHOUSE - dwelling units contain1
units designed in such a way that they a
and are separated from each other by a fl
; each
unit provided with lftdependent access
APARTMENT-A room or suite of two or m
designed and intended for, or occupied by one family for
of each other and doing their own cooking in the
building, shall include flats and apartments _ _ _....
g.
2.
,,
r
• APARTMENT BUILDINGS - includes buildings
(3) or more living unitS with
11N1.-n•ndent cooking and bathroom facilities,
containing thr
1
whether designated as condominium, row house,
Review Module on Architectural Design
·- - -
Itt
·u
-
Chapter 2 : RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
ap rtment hou e, tenement, garden apartment , or
by ny other name.
•
LODGING OR ROOM ING HOUSES - includes buildings
which separate sleeping rooms are rented
pro ·ding sl eping accommodations for a total of
fiftffn 15) or less persons, on either t ransient or
permanent basis_wfl'h or without meals, but irfthout
separate cooking facilities for individual occupants.
in
SINGLE-AND-TWO FAMILY DWEWNGS- includes
detached dwellings in which each living unit is
occupied by members of a Sinp! family.
•
3.
Batas Pambansa 220 (Economic and Socialized Housing)
a . ECONOMIC HOUSING- a type of housing project
provided-for average income families
b. SOCIAUZED HOUSING - refers to housing programs and
projects covering houses and lots and home lots only
Wldertaken by the government or the private sector for
the underprivileged and homefess citizens, which shall
include sites and services development, long term
lnancing, fiberalized terms on interest payments and
such other benefits in accordance with the provisions of
A.A. 7279, or the urban development and tiouslng act of
2
4.
Presidential Decree 957 (Open Market Housing)
a. COM MERCIAL CONDOMINIUM - a building or group of
bulkrmgs, used for office or businesses, professiona
services and other commercial enterprise organized,
owned and maintained as a condominium .
b. CONDOMINIUM
shall mean an interest in real property consisting of a
separate interest in a unit in a residential, industrial,
or commercial building and an undivided interest in
common directly or indirectly, in the land on which it
is located and in other common areas of the building.
- A building in which each rnd1Yldual unit is held in
4,_ep1rate private ownership and all floor space,
facilities and outdoor areas used in common by all
tenants are owed, administered and maintained by a
corporation created pursuant to the provisions of the
appropriate statute.
An individual dwelling unit under individual
ownership in a multiple unit development with
common elements in which:
• The units comprise not only the space enclosed
by the unit boundaries, but all material parts of
the land within the space;
• The common element means all the property
within the development except the units;
• The common element is owned by all of the
owners.
A building or group of buildings, in which each unit is
owned individually, and the structure, common areas
and facilities are owned by the owners on a
proportional undivided basis.
c.
CONDOMINIUM UNIT - means a part of the
condominium project intended for any type of
Independent use or ownership, including one or more
floors (or part or parts of floors) in a building or buildings
and such accessories as may be appended thereto.
Revtew Module on Architectural Design
•
Chapter 2: RESIDENTIAL 6UILDINGS
•
clubhouses and recreational uses such as golf
courses, tennis courts, basketball courts,
swimming pools and similar uses operated by the
government or private individuals as membership
organizations for the benefit of their members,
families, and guests and not operated primarily
for gain.
~
rooms th•t may be ~ as residence,
.a ·n sle-eping, cooki ng and toilet facilities.
or more habtt•ble rooms designed or intended
u~
one or more individuals as an independent
•lld parate house.keeping establishment in which
se.pa te le' then and sanitary facilities are provided
the exclusive use of such individual or individuals,
a pnvate entrance from outside the building or
ro a common hallway or stairway inside the
1
•
•
b: ldmg.
e
E.DIUM COST AND OPEN MARKET - refers to housing
s,ro,ects whe,e prices of house and lot pacbges are
W1'.thln the suggested price ranges as determined through
HUOCC resolution and falling under the standards
prescribed.
8-.
OCCUPANCY CtASSIFICATIONS
1.
PO 1096
a. Group A - Residential Dwellings
• Division 1 - Residential building/structure for
exdusive use of single famlly occupants including:
school or company staff housing;
single (nuclear) family dwellings;
churches or similar places of worship;
church rectories; community facilities and social
centers;
parks, playgrounds, pocket parks, parkways,
promenades and play lots;
b.
Division 2 - Residential building for the exclusive use
of nc,n-leasing occupants not exceeding 10 persons
including:
single-attached or duplex or townhouses, each
privately owned;
school dormitories (on campus);
convents and monasteries;
military or police barracks/dormitories;
pre-schools, elementary and high schools,
provided that they do not exceed 16 classrooms;
outpatient clinics, family planning clinics, lying-in
clinics, diagnostic clinics, medical and clinical
laboratories;
- branch library and museums;
- steam/dry cleaning outlets;
- party needs and accessories (leasing of tables and
chairs, etc.).
Group B - Residentials, Hotels and Apartments
Group 8 Occupancies shall be multiple dwelling units
including boarding or lodging houses, hotels, apartment
buildings, row houses, convents, monasteries and other
similar building each of which accommodates more than
lOpersons.
. Review Module on Architectural Design
'J
~
C ha pter 2 : RESIDENTIAL 6UtLDINGS
dwellincs with mixed housing types. R-3 structures may
include low-rise or medium-rise residential condominium
buildings that are already commercial in nat ure and scale.
unity ancillary uses on a
ea~t11a1U11..,1Slons and
comm111Nties
2) - a Medium de
~
nt ial use or
characterized mainly as a low-rise single attached,
:i-le ~, building/structure for exclusive use as
dwellings. This includes R-2 structures within
s,e,~m:tusNe residentia commun
which are not
~1..\lli,..., ,
c
-2 Use or Occupancy
Basic R - 2: single-attached or duplex
building/structur e of from one (1) storey up to
three (3) storey in height and w ith each unit for
separate use as single family dwellings
~
m R-2: tow-rise multi-level
building/str ucture of from three (3) up to five (5)
storey in height and for use as multiple fam ily
2 Types of R-3 Use or Occupancy:
o Basic R-3: row house building/structure of from
one 1 stor_ey up to three (3) storey in height and
with each unit for separate use as single-family
dwellings
o Maximum R-3: medium rise multi-level
building/structure of from six (6t up t o twelve
2) storey in heigtlt and for use as multiple
family dwellings
4. R- 4 (Residentiat 4) - a medium to high density
residential use or occupancy, characterized mainly as a
low-rise townhouse building/structure for exclusive use
as multiple family dwellings. The term R-4 specifically
refers to the building/structure on an individual lot (a
townhouse unit) and generally refers to the series or
rows of R-4 buildings/structures within a subdivided lot
or property (an R-4 development).
5. R- 5 (Residential 5)- a very Filgti ensity residential use
or occupancy, characterized mainly as a medium-rise or
high-rise condominium building/structure for exclusive
use as multiple family dwelling.
dwellings
3. II - 3 (Residential 3)- a hilh density residential use or
occupancy, char acterized mainly as a low-rise or medlumMlliilftil,v, ,structure
for exclusive use as multiple family
Review Module on Architectural D~&lgn
---C...uL
Cha~ 2 : RESfDENllAL et.JfLDtNGS
Zoninc
AllowatM Firewal
2-
Firewall Pr<Mlblt
Madnun L.eftl1h
Mdml,m He1ott
I
Pr"owtsionl from R.we VU of PO 1.896
R-5
eu.t:ed ],,';,;.
poperty ~total
ma
not~~
50-t. r,f ~r...:
3 2 meter~•
One side & rear
;. ~ ~ ~
Sadesh:Jfl
fl~
notexett.d 85%of
~ ptOPP.rty line;
note-xe.ttd 65%c;f
Twos.des &rea •••
Twosides
Hotfirng
mentioned
Side shall not
exceed 85% of side
property line; total
shall not exceed
50%of perimeter
•
Rear: 3 2 meter$
At a height above 1.5 met.en from the est.ab ished grade
level, the abutment shall be constructed of perforated
Side: 2 rtorey'.:>
••
°'
decorative concrete bloch.
ma ( be extended up
to_..,,.
if.~ ~
property fine k
only 4 meters
•••
Nothing
mentioned
Up to 3 storeys
For Basic R-3, abutments on two sides and rear property
lines may be allowed provided the fotlowing
requirements are first complied with:
• Open space as prescr1bed in Reference iable for
Maximum PSO, TOSL
•
Window ope rein& as prescribed
•
Firewatlwith ,.limumoftwo-ftOUrfir
resistive rating corwucted with a minimum
height clea a nee
A00 mllmeteB above the.:
roof.
~
I
\
r
Totatlengtft w tl
&reat
r~
property line; rear
~ ail not- .:rcieed
S<1¼.of rear
property line; total
~'ltf?.s.de:s
lot ()e' l~ter
Side/rear firewall
sha not exceed
90% ,;,f .._Ide/rear
prope.rty line••;
Total length shall
not exceed 50% of
lot pt:ri meter
'ff!(~
· 14 rr ~
Module on Architectural De&lgn
.-
Chapur 2: RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
2.
in' um Sel
fo r R
bfe ~ of PO 1096)
fR
5 Identlal
• • lot.Olli
ntial Use/Occupancy
R- 3
R- 4
(meters)
0 ,
,s
e
3. Development Controls for R-1 Lots (Figure Vlll.1 of PD 1096)
Bultdlngs/Structures
R-5
Basic
Maximum
••••
(meters}
(mete~)
(mete~)
a.o•
3.0
a;.
4.5
6.0
2.0 ••
•••
z.o
2.0
3
optional
option
al
2.0
2.0
I
2.0
•••
-----
b
3.0
,...._ _,..,,,ts m Tubk VIII.Z aboVf! an for n-fy-developed subdivisions.
gra~ (or natural ground} level, i.e., s-.00 met«s + 5.00 tMters-=
parking requirement outside the
front yard}. ~ =and ond uppt!rfloors and menan fne level shall
~
·m
3 0 0 ~ setback unless otherwise provided under
aiaa...11CaN1,..,_PPporf of*
·
cJ ,.., ~tflact
••nu.m
· ~ foronfy one (1) side. Sl!tboclcs on two sides shall be optional.
,u,~,f'I-""' on t.o sitNs and ~r prope_rty fines may be allowed with conditions as
-11A11~,rBJ under .s«tJon 804,
Subs«tion 10 of this Rule.
In R-5 i,ts
considered a commercial use or
a/fM Grass fiJorMO {GFAA
C
•- - •- - ~
ore impossible to attain or where frontage and depth of
loa ore
to
II/ Opel, Mort~ or Mediutn Cost Housin9 Proj«tS. abutments on
thie sides and r e a r ~ Ines may be afJowed and 1.50 meters front yard is left open as
PUBLIC RROW OR ACCESS STREET
jROAO RIINT · OF . WAY)
11\HtSit>on ~
RA!vlew Module on Architectural Design
•
f
Chapter 2 : RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
5.
(Table Vl ll.1 o f PO 1096)
Duly Approved
Zoning !:I
Basic R-2
-
·mum R-2
Basic R-3
c-
-
Mmdmum R-3
R-4
Building Height Limit (Table Vll.2 of PD 1096)
Maximum PSO, MHimum ISA, Minimum USA, & TOSL
4.
- -
~ of Total Lot Area (TLA)
M aximum
M aximum
M inimum
Allowable
Allowable
USA
PSO
ISA c
(Unpaved
(Paved
Open
Open
Spaces)
Spaces)
55.,
30
15
60 ,
30
10
60.,
30
70,
65 ..,
70,
70.,
20
30
20
20
10
20
10
20
10
so,
70.,
so,
R-5
70.,
so,
Note:
e - for buildings without firewall
f - for buildings with firewall
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Character of
Use or
Occupancy
Type of Building/
Structure
1. Residential
Residential 1 (R-1)
Residential 2 (R-2)
a. Basic
b. Maximum
Residential 3 (R-3)
a. Basic
b. Maximum
Residential 4 (R-4)/
Townhouses
(individual lots/units)
Residential 5 (R-5)/
Condominiums
TOSL d
(ISA+ USA)
4
45
40
40
30
40
30
30
20
30_ _
20
30
20
fl
J
I•
Building Height Limit (BHL)
Number of
Meters
allowable
above
storey/floors
highest
above
grade
established
grade
10.0
3
3
5
10.0
15.0
I
3
12
10.0
36.0
3
10.0
12-18
36.0-54.0
6 Floor to Lot Area Ratio (Table VII.G.1 of PD 1096}
Type of Building/Structure
Residential 1
Residential 2 (Basic)
Residential 2 (Maximum)
Residential 3 (Basic)
Residential 3 (Maximum)
Residential 4
Residential 5
FLAR Designation/Rights
1.5
1.3- 1.5
2.1 - 3.0
1.8-2.1
7 .1-8.1
1.6-1.8
6.0-9.0
Review Module on Archluctural Design
'
Chapter 2 : RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
. .
7. M aximum Total Gross Floor Area
(Table Vll.1 of PD 1096)
Type of
Building/
Structure
Resident ial
1 (R-1)
Basic
Residential
2 (R-2)
Maximum
ResKfent ial
Type of
Building/
Structure
Interior
Lot and
End Lot
Inside
lot
Corner
Lot
Through
Lot
CornerThrough
Lot
Basic
Residential
3 (R-3)
Maximum
Residential
3 (R-3)
Residential
4 (R-4)/
Individual
Townhouse
Lots/Units
Residential
5 (R-5)/
Condomini
urns
3x
70%
3x
70%
3x
70%
3 x70%
3x
70%
12x80
%
12x80
%
12x80
%
12x80%
12x80
%
12x80%
3x
80%
3x
80%
3x
80%
3x80%
3x
80%
3x80%
18x80
%
18x80
%
18x80
%
18x80%
18x80
%
18x80%
Allowable Maximum Total Gross Floor Area (TGFA)*
by Type/ Location of Lot
• ot e: Building Height Limit (BHL) multiplied by the
Allowable M aximum Building Footprint (AMBF) expressed
as a percentage (%) of the Total Lot Area or TLA (with or
wit hout firew all). Figure subject to reduction to comply
with the floor area component of the Allowable Maximum
Vo lume of Build ing (AMVB). Refer to Table Vll.1 to arrive
at the percentage (%) of TLA.
Interior Inside
Corner
Through CornerCorner
Lot
Through
Lot
Lot
Lot
Lot
Abutting
and
Lot
3 or
End
more
Lot
streets,
rivers,
etc
3x70%
3x70%
3x
3x
3x
3x
ofTLA
70%of ofTLA
70%of
50%of
60%
TLA
TLA
of TLA TLA
3 X 70%
3 X 70%
3x
3x
3x
3x
ofTLA
ofTLA
70%of 70%of
60%of
70%
TLA
TLA
of TLA TLA
Sx70%
5x70%
Sx
Sx
Sx
Sx
70%
70%
60%
70%
•
Comer
lot
Abutting
3 or
more
streets,
rivers,
etc
3x70%
*TGFA must be adjusted so that t he AMVB must not
be exceeded.
2 (R-2)
R.evtew Module on Architectural Design
Chap-ta- 2 : RESIDENTIAL 6UtLD1NG-S
E.
GDIBtJU. DESMiN· REQ
M£Hl'S
•
_,.
ezzanine floors: not less tha ."""'....._'-'--'
and beto ·
Space Req .reme ts
g.
•
a· s.pacepe ~ ,
Encio5ure of V ...-i!.,...,,.l Openu1gs
•
. ducts
Group
ocnr~ a
be
enclosed in a
orisions of the (.ode_
Ccnstroction A n d ~
depetldupon
oa,tioJlar type
•
•
•
2.40naeter's
>
smrer.
si
smrey - ·
2.70 Meters
~~,lD6Pl/ msi
· ~·• iDI01ii!liln
S u e ~ s::«~ 2.10 Meler5 unobstructed
head,1
•..
desrance
N2"1ltJraSYrt.:iatio
" n:·
not less
areas
resistive
~
.consb'Uction
Ch111pt4!r 2 : RESIDENTIAL 6UILDII\IGS
•
in t II d in all bu ldings exceeding
•
•
w t r from a bulldlng shall not be
flow o~r public prop rty, except for
nd Group J Occupancies.
•
St lrs, E ,t , And Occupant Loads
•
Construction of st airs and exit s shall conform to the
oc-eup nt load requirements of the building.
Th occupant load permitted in any building shall be
d terrnin d by d ividing the floor area assigned to that
use by the unit area allowed per occupant.
•
Use or Occupancy
Unit Area per
Occupant
(square meters)
28.00
11.60
18.60
• 11.60
_:5111ep1na Departments shall
Ow elli~s
Hotels
Apartments
Dormitor'ies
..
k.
•
Minimum Two (2)Exits
other than Elevators
are Required where
Number of Occupants
Is Over
10
10
10
be based on one~1J
At least one (1) exit; upper floors having an
occupant load of more than ten (10) shall have at
least two (2) exits.
•
10
Number of Exits
•
•
I.
Mezzanine floor used ot her than storage
purposes, if greater than 185.0 !iquare meters o r
more than 18.0 meters In any dimension, shall
have at least two (2) stairways to an adjacent
floor.
Every storey with an occupant load of 500-999=
at least thr (3) exits.
1000 or more occupant load= at least four (4)
exits
Number of exits from any storey shall be
determined by using the occupant loads of floors
which exit through the level under consideration
as follows:
• 50% of the occupant load in the first
adjacent storey above (and the
t adjacent
storey below, when the storey below exits
through the level under consideration)
2"' of the occupant load in the storey
immediately beyond the first adjacent storey
Floors above second storey, basements and
tellars used for other than service of the building
shall have minimum f two (2) exits.
e
Width of Exits
• Total width of exits shall not be less than total
occupant load d ivided by 165
• Total width of exits computed shall be divided
approximately equally among the separate exits.
•
Total width of exits required from any storey shall
be determined by using the occupant loads of
that storey plus the percentage of the occupant
Revtew Module on Architectural Design
,.
Chapter 2: RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
•
loads of floors which exits through the level
under consideration as follows:
- 50% of the occupant load in the first
adj acent storey above (and the first adjacent
storey below, when the storey below exits
through the level under consideration)
- 25% of the occupant load in the storey
immediately beyond the first adjacent storey
The maximum width from any storey of a
building shall be maintained.
m. Arrangement of Exits
•
If only two
exits are required they shall be
~laced a distance apart by not less than one-fifth
(l/ of the perimeter of the area served
measured in a straight line between exits.
•
If three
or more exits are required, they shall
be arranged a reasonable distance apart.
n.
Distance to Exits
•
No point in a building without a sprinkler system
shall be more than 45. meters from an exterior
exit door, a horizontal exit, exit passageway, or
an enclosed stairway, measured along the line of
travel.
•
o.
Doors
•
If equipped with complete fire extinguishing
em, distance from exits may be increased to
Minimum width of required exit door - 0.90
Minimum height of required exit door 2.0
meters
Doors in exit doorways should be capable of
being opened at least 90 degrees
Minimum clear width of exit wa - 0.70 meters
Maximum door leaf width - 1.20 meters
In Group A and B Occupancies, a door may open
on the top step of a flight of stairs or exterior
landing provided the door does not swing over
the top step or exterior landing and the landing is
not more th 200mmbelow the floor level.
•
•
•
•
•
p. Corridors and Exterior Exit Balconies
•
Minimum width of corridor or exit balcon - 1.10
meters
• Trim handrails and doors when fully opened shall
not reduce the required width by more than
00mm
• M inimum length of dead ends in corridors and
exterior exit balconies - 6.0 meters
q.
Stairways
•
Minimum stairway width
For an occupant load of more than S0-1.10
meters
For an occupant load of 50 or less - 0.90
meters
Private stairways serving an occupant load of
less than 10 -0.75 meters
• Trim and handrails shall not reduce the required
width by more than 100mm
•
Maximum rise of every step - 200 mm
meter
Review Module on Archltectural Design
Chap~r 2: RESIDENTlAL t3UILDINGS
Min1mur, run
•
M imum v ri t ion of riser and treads In any one
flight S mm
•
Wtndin stairways may be used for Group A and
1n p vate stairways in Group B Occupancies if the
required width of the run is provided at a point
not more than 300 mm from side of stairway
where treads are narrower, but in no case shall
t he w idth of run be less than 150hlm at ay point.
Minimum width of run for circular stairs - 250 _
mm
M aximum variation of treads for circular stairs 5
Minimum width of landing (measured in the
direction of travel) equal tota-\Vidth of stairway
Minimum width of landing if stair
traight run
•
•
•
2SO mm
•
r.
Ramps
• Maximum slope of ramp 1:8
• Finish of ramp - roughened or approved non-slip
material
• If slope is more tha ___-=""'
andr:aUs
s.
Penthouses and Roof Structures
• Maximum penthouse or projections above the
roof if used as an enclosure for tanks or for
elevators 8.40 meters
• Area of penthouses and roof structures shall not
exceed one-thi=.i,..,._.iu of area of supporting roof
t
•
- L20meters
•
Minimum vertical distance between landings -
•
Handrails on stairways serving one individual
dwelling unit in Group A or 8 Occupancies may
have one handrail on the open sides
Required for all areas 200 squaie..meters or more
and witlloccupant load of more than twenty
20).
3.60meters
u. Parking Slot Requirements
For R-1,:R-2 and 'R-3 Occupancies
•
M inimum 800mm above nosi g of treads
Maximum 900mm above nosi g of treads
•
Handrails not required if stairways have less than
•
four (4) risers
•
•
Minimum headroom clearance - 2.0 meters
Stairs in Group A Occupancies need not be
endosed
•
32.0 to 72.0 sq. m. lot or units with 18.0 to 22.0
sq. m. GFA- minimum one (1) parking slot for
every six (6) lots/units
50.0 to 96.0 sq. m . lot or units with 30.0 to 42.0
sq. m. GFA - minimum one (1) parking slot for
every four (4) lots/units
100.0 to 120.0 sq. m. lot or units with 30.0 to
42.0 sq. m. GFA- minimum one (1) parking slot
for every lot/unit
Review Module on Architectural Design
!
Chapter 2 : RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
,1 m
•
0
a
fore
t r un t with mm,mum
( 1) p rking slot
MOTE
WHEN IIIJIIIE.R Of INOfPENOENl
LNIIG INTS Willi IOVl>UM. ElfTIWICES
IS INCREASED AS Ill lU.11-SlOIIIEY
APARTMENTS. ltl: WIDTII or T1I: ACCESS
ROAD
SIW.l
BE
llatfASED
COIIIIESPONOINGlY AS PER l.Alll.E Vil. 14. 2
PARMING SPN:f. SKAU. BE PltOYllED
EXClUSM: Of ACCESS ROAD ! I E ~.
m. GFA - minimum one (1)
ry two (2) units or a fraction
to 150 O sq. m. GFA- minimum
l 1 ) a 108 slot for NCh unit
w ith mote th an 150.0 sq . m. GFA m two (2) parking slots for each unit
t h 50 0
f!
•
3.00 II WIDE IINUI
ACC!ll"°'°FOll•fll
lNTS
STltEET
"8,JC llo.0 IUOIIT-OF-YIMOIIII
Figurt V1II.G.5.
•
9\all have a RROW/access street
a m1mmum width depending upon the number
o buildings or units which it serves provided,
however, that said RROW/access street shall not be
ss than 3 00 meters in width and provided further
thaLsuch RROW shall be provided with a minimum
4 00 meters wide chaflan at its intersect with the
main RROW and prov1ded, finally, that such RROW
shall not be used for any form of parking.
U £ , 4 4 , ~ ~ ~.....~
/ .raY / / / / 1 s
~
!
\
3.QOIIIIJE
........ ,cxus
STlll!l!T
tNlllC ~ llDIT~Y IMO#)
~FOi'-~
INTI
Review Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 2: RESIDENTIAL 6UILDINGS
For mult iple dwelling units :
Tablt VII.G.J. Alnimum ROid Right-of-Way (RROW) Proviaiona for DeYelopmentl with
Table 1: CAPACITY FACTORS
Multjple Dwelling Unitl
u~
I,
M!rtmum
tdt of
·
Camagewa;"
n; Lnrts
Road,,a
meters:
3 ~J
. i: ' ) $•• , .; .rlls
Se,'€11 , - , uP IC' 'teen IS,IJ"\Jls
'3 )'"'-'" • .;
l.t: b
Total Width of the
ROW
imel€fsl
(meters,
.; 0()
Mrumum
0-30
i ,h
J
20
·H >'.l
~
5 00
1 l)O
7 ()'.)
ffit, •S.JI .<':: l u:J lo
• 'I r ,.,-.e :.;5 .;n,ts
600
I:;:,
8 ())
·.m -.an o-rt,5 ,e ,35, 1Y11ts
5 7:i
I 00
8 70
,. ,.,en1 ,.r .e
2::
un :s
T
I
Mm11T1Um
','\1dth of &dewal
on each side
Level Componenls
and Ramps
(wid th oer person)
stairways
(width per person)
Area
Boord and C are
Health C are.
Sprinklered
Health Care. Non
Sprinklered
Hioh Hazards
All O thers
I
-
r
1-
mm
in
10
1.6
0 .4
mm
5
0.3
5
0.2
15
0.6
l--3
0.5
18
0 .7
0.3
JQ
0.<4
5
0.4
7.6
,_
in
0 .2- .
i- .J
b. Hotels And Dormitories
2.
RA 9514 (Fire Code of the ·Philippines)
•
a.
General
•
Occupant Load
one (1) person per 18.6 square meters gross floor
area, except for detached single and two-family
dwellings
any open mezzanine and balcony shall be added
to the occupant load of the floor below for the
purpose of determining exit capacity
•
capacity Of Exits
Minimum width of means of egress= 915mm
Minimum door width = 710mm
For double doors, one door shall not be less than
710mm
Maximum door width = 1220mm
Based on capacity factors for type of occupancy:
Exit Detail Requirements
For rooms with capacity of less than fifty (SO)
persons with outside door at street level may
have such outside door as a single exit provided
that no part of the room or area is more than
15.25 meters from the door.
Any floor below the floor of exit discharge not
open to the public and used only for mechanical
equipment, storage, and service operations
(other than kitchens which are considered part of
the hotel occupancy) shall have exits appropriate
to its actual occupancy.
The same stairway or other exit required to serve
any one upper floor may also serve other upper
floor.
Review Module on Archluctural Design
Chapu,- 2: ~SIDENTIAL 6UILD1NGS
•
Types of Exits
c.
Apartment Buildings
Doors, provided t hat if it is used as means of
egress, shall not be locked against egress when
building is occupied.
Stairs and smoke proof enclosures
Ramps
Horizontal exit
•
Minimum Corridor Width "' 1120mm
•
Number of Exits : m inimum two (2) exits
•
Travel Dist ance of Exits
m aximum 30 meters fro m any room to exit door
maximum 23 meters within a guest suite to
corridor door if not protected by approved,
automat ic sprinkler system
maxim um 38 meters w it hin a guest suite to
corridor door if protected by approved,
automatic sprinkler syst em
•
be self-closing
Common path of travel shall not exceed ten (10)
I
General Types and capacities of Exits
Street floor exits shail be sufficient for the
occupant load of the street floor plus the
required capacity of stairs and ramps discharg.ng
onto the street floor
•
Number of Exits
Every living unit shall have access to at least t wo
(2) separat e exits, except:
o If unit has an exit directly to the street or
yard at ground level or with an outside
stairway that serve maximum of two (2) units
o Apartment buildings not more an t hr ee (3)
meters in height with maxim um six (6) living
units per floor, with smoke proof enclosure
or an outside stairway as the exit, may have a
single exit
•
M inimum Corridor Width
1120 mm (if more than 50 persons)
910 mm (if less than 50 persons)
•
Travel Distance of Exits
maximum 15.50 meters from any individual unit
to nearest exit
Entrance door within 31 met ers from an exit if
not protected by approved, automat ic spf'ink_\er
Access to and Arrangement of Exits
Means of egress shall be so arranged that from
any point in the building, exits will be accessible
in at least t wo (2) different direct ions
Doors between guest rooms and corridors shall
t
•
meters
Dead end corridors shall not exceed six (6)
meters
•
system
Entrance door within 46.5 meters fro m an exit if
protected by approved, automatic sprinkler
syst em
~ew Module on Architectural Design
..
Chapter 2 : RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
Except if room has two (2) doors providing
separate ways of escape or has a door leading
directly outside the building
Minimum 900mm wide exit access
Segregation of Dwelling Units
For row houses, partit ion walls shall have a fou rhour fire resistance rating and constructed one
(1) m eter above ridge line of roof
d.
e.
•
Lodging Or Rooming Houses
Refers t o lodging or rooming houses providing sleeping
accommodations for less than fifteen (15) persons
•
Means of Escape Requirement
Shall have access to two (2) means of escape
Every sleeping room shall have access to t w o (2)
separate means of exit; at least one (1) shall
consist of an enclosed interior sta irway, an
exterior stairway, a fire escape or a horizontal
exit
Single And Two Family Dwellings
•
Means of Escape Requirement
. In any dwelling of more than t wo (2) rooms,
every room used for sleeping, living or din ing
purposes shall have at least two means of escape,
at least one of which shall be a door or stairway
Every sleeping room shall have at least one
outside window which:
o
can be opened from the inside w ithout
the use of tools, keys, or special
o
knowledge
minimum 560mm in clear w idth
o
o
minimum 800mm in height
bottom of the opening minimum
1220mm from floor
"
Doors
M inimum 700mm clear w idth for doors in the
path of travel
2.
BP 220 (Economic and Socialized Housln1)
Parameters
Project Location
M inimum Lot Areas
a. Single Detached
b. Duplex
c. Rowhouse
M inimum Lot Front age
a. Single Detached
corner lot
•
•
•
•
regular lot
irregular lot
interior lot
b. Duplex
c. Rowhouse
Length of Block
Economic
l
Socialized
W ithin Suitable site for housing and
outside hazard prone areas
72 sqm
36 sqm
64 sqm
48sqm
28sqm
8 meters
8 meters
4 meters
3 meters
6 meters
4 meters
8 meters
8 meters
4 meters
3 meters
6 meters
3.5 meters
54sqm
Max. 400 meters
Provide allev/pathwalk for b\ocks
more than 250 meters
r
.......J
RA,vtew Module on Archtuctural Design
\
a .
Chapu r 2 · RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
arameters
'ght of
Economic
a
Socialized
M in. W idth of interconnecting road
proj ect for interior subdivision = 10 m
Set back of 3 m x 5 m at both sides of
subdivision ent rance
i . Widt h of Planting St r ip
I-' S) & Si ew al (SW )
For 15 m RRO W
For 12 m RROW
For 10m RROW
For8 m RROW
For 6 m RROW
W ater Suppfy Con nection
M inimum W at er Supply
Parameters
PS
1.3 m et ers
0.8 meter
0.8 meter
0.4 meter
Optional
SW
1.2 meters
1.2 meters
1.2 meters
0.6 meter
0.5 meter
Mandatory connectio n to public w at er
system
150 liters per capita per day
M inimum Floor Area
I.
Minimum Level of
Completion
Minimum Setbacks
Front
Side
Rear
Drainage System
Sewage Disposal System
• Mandatory connection t o loca l
pow er source
• Provide street light ing for every 50
m et er d istance
• Installation shall be in accordance
w/ Philippine Electrical Code
Concrete-lined canal
Indiv idual Septic Tank
Medium Cost
22 sqm
18sqm
Complete house
Shell house
1.5 meters
1.5 meters
2.0 meters
Minimum Ceiling Height
2 meters
Minimum Stairway Width
600mm
Maximum Riser Height
250mm
M inimum Tread Depth
200mm
M inimum Door Dimensions
Electrical Power Supply
Open Market
3.
Parameters
Proj ect Location
Land Allocation
0.8 x 2.0 meters for main door
O.7 x 2.0 meter for service door
0.6 x 2.0 meter fo r toilet door
PD 957 (Open Market Housing)
Open Market
I
Medium Cost
Within Suitable site for housing and
outside hazard prone areas
Maximum Saleable - 70%
M inimum Non Saleable - 30%
0-.
Review Module on Architectural Design
\
Chapur 2: RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
Parameters
M inimum Lot Areas
a Single Detached
b Duplex
c Rowhouse
M inimum Lot Frontage
a Single Detached
• comer lot
• regular lot
• irregular lot
interior lot
b Duplex
c Rowhouse
•
Length of Block
Road Right of Way
Open Market
Medium Cost
120 sqm
96sqm
60sqm
100 sqm
80sqm
50 sqm
Parameters
Open Market
Water Supply Connection
J
12 meters
10 meters
6 meters
3 meters
8 meters
4 meters
Minimum Water Supply
150 liters per capita per day
Electrical Power Supply
• Mandatory connection to local
power source
• Provide street lighting for every 50
meter distance
• Installation shall be in accordance
w/ Philippine Electrical Code
,
l
Drainage System
Min. Width of interconnecting road
project for interior subdivision = 10 m
Sewage Disposal System
Underground
Individual Septic Tank
Minimum House Floor Area
42 sqm
Minimum Floor Area
(Condominium Unit )
36sqm
PS
1.3 meters
0.8 meter
0.8 meter
0.4 meter .
Optional
SW
1.2 meters
1.2 meters
1.2 meters
0.6 meter
0.5 meter
30sqm
22sqm
* 18 sqm for single
occupants
•12 sqm for
student/employee
Setback of 3 m x 5 m at both sides of
subdivision entrance
M in. Width of Planting Strip
(PS) & Sidewalk (SW)
For 15 m RROW
For 12 m RROW
For 10m RROW
Fors m RROW
For 6 m RROW
Medium Cost
Mandatory connection to public water
system
V
Max. 400 meters
Provide alley/pathwalk for blocks
more than 250 meters
I
Minimum Level of
Completion
Complete house
Minimum Setbacks
Shall conform w ith National Building
Code provisions
Minimum Ceiling Height
Shall conform with National Bu\\ding
Code provisions
Complete house
~ew Module on Archttectw-• De&lgn
\
.
'
C hapter 2 : RESIDENTIAL BUI L D INGS
Parameters
n1rT' um Stairway Width
Open Market
I Medium Cost
•
Shall conform with National Building
Code provisions
r
MaxIr1um Riser Height
200mm
Minimum read Depth
250mm
M inimum Door Dimensions
F.
Shall conform with National Building
Code provisions
•
SINGLE-fAMJLY DWEWNGS
1.
Clearances
Adequate traffic lane between main entrance and
major seating group - mini mum 1.0 meters,
preferred 1.30 met ers
1500mm between facing seats
500mm where circulation occurs between furniture
750mm for use at desk
900mm for main traffic
1500 between television set and seating
living Rooms
•
Planning Considerations For Living Areas
Through traffic should be separated from activity
centers
Opening should be located t o give enough wall space
for various furniture arrangements
Convenient access to doors, windows, electrical
outlets, thermostats and supply grills
Passageway between low objects should be minimum
400mm
Passageway between low objects should be m in imum
600mm
Passageway for general traffic lane minimum 1000
2.
Furniture Groups
Primary Group - chairs and sofa
- Secondary Group - chairs and love seat grouped at
end of room or at the center
- Reading Group - chair, ottoman, lamp, table
- Writing or Study Group - desk. lamp, one or two
chairs, book cases
- Music Group - piano, bench, storage space
- Game Group - game tables and four chairs
..
Telev1s1on Group - television set and several chairs
-
Bedrooms
•
Planning Considerations
Size - depends on t he preferences o f t he owner
Type and number of beds
Oth er items that the owner would want
mm
M inimum clearance of 900 mm to permit a person at
the back of an occupied chair
:..
Review M o dule on Archttectural Design
'llJ<r rn
](J(_JIJr, rn , ◄,
o ,dr
'.
of drawers
~'.;umm 0 fllJ m for major o r
closet, etc.)
&oOmm to 700mm o o ne Slde of bed for ·rw lation
300mm to 40Clmm o n least Uied side of ~ bed
c e
•
s
OOUILE/FUU
TWIN
E
Furniture Arrangements
Location of doors and windows should ;,ermit
alternative furniture arrangements
3. Dining Areas
CJ
•
QUEEN
l(fN6
Sovtr~: Att:Ht~ctural Graphic Standards, Stud~nt Edition
~
~
John Wiley and Sons Inc, 2008.
•
Oeara ces
M inimum SOmm clearance between wall and
furniture
Minimum 75mm clearance between furniture units
•
•
Planning Considerations
Number of persons to be seated
Space used at the table
Space for chairs and passage behind them
Seating arrangement
Size and type of furniture
Storage space
Size of Place Setting
Minimum width for each place setting - 500mm ;
preferred 750mm for greater freedom of movement;
600mm adequate for each place setting; permits
chairs 450mm wide chairs to be placed 150mm apart
Minimum depth for a place setting - 350mm
furniture Clearances
1000mm to 1100mm at one side or foot of bed for
dressing
Review Module on Architectural Design
•
is
SHI
tf no one · seated at end o
be reduced to 600mm.
the ta
•
Space
• the length may
Areas
•... -"I Q
I II
□
'--------r--- .,. _
.. ··--
1 - - - !JIO---I
rqaia ■ UII
Sotlt're: Neufert. Ernst and Pe~r. Arr:Jtitm's Doto. ~ ed.
Chtjord: ~~~ 5oima> Ltd, 2000.
Revtew Module on Archttectural D ~
Chapter 2 : RESlDENTIAL 6UlLDINGS
•
Ta
cn::IIW€1ed seating, 500 mm on the table's perimeter
comfortable seating. 600
S>T075
t
1200mm
t
t
1a -
t
501075
0
TabLe lex low
t
40
·--
t
FIGURE 1-13 SIZE OF PLACE SEmNG
Source: Fajardo, Max. Planning and Designers Handbook.
Quezon City: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
z"'
ed.
Tableb1aa
Typica clnlng f00ffl bnftur9
Source: De Chiara, Joseph and M ich~/ Crosb e. Time Sover
Standards for Building Types. 411o ed. McGraw-H1II, 2001 .
•
~
ModUle on Archttectural D ~
Chapter 2: RESIDENTIAL ~UILDING5
•
M inimum Furniture Clearances
800 mm for chairs plus access theretG
950 mm for chairs plus access and passage
1050 mm for serving from behind chair
600 mm for passage only
1200 mm from tabte to base cabinet (in diningkitchen setup)
Place for entertaining
Place for child care
Much time and effort are being spent in the kitchen than in
any other place in the house, which is why good planning
demands for the right selection of appliances, storage unit and
the convenient arrangement of the area.
Kitchens should face nortt,:!asfifl'north-west and should be
well located internally with respect to the dining room, pantry
ane.qtility roo
r------------ --,
entrance
hall
;
ut1l1ty room
------------•garden gate
350
H
kitchen
r--------------,
si de entrance
cellar steps
/
Source: Fajardo, Max.
Planning and Designers
nd
Handbook. 2 ed.
Quezon City: 5138
Merchandising, 1996.
children·s play
area
·-------------.,
d ining room
,
pantry
,
~--------------~
vegetable
garden
liv i ng room
- - -
-
v,ew from kuchen
routes
•••••• ••••.
4. Kitchens
A kitchen is a place or area where:
Meals are prepared and cooked
Foods are preserved
Food and utensils are stored
Place for eating
Place for laundering
rooms normal only m larger houses
Relationship betwNn large kitchen and other are••
rd
Source: Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Data. 3 ed.
Oxford: Blackwell Science Ltd, 2000.
•
Planning Considerations
Arrangement
Traffic lanes
Review Module on Architectural Design
~
L--------------J
ooep
Chapter 2 : RESIDENTIAL 6UILDll'-IGS
nd wo ing surfaces
and replacement of appliances
, Counter
.
l
ccessibility
Decoration
•
70
76
➔
100
i
•
SPACE FOR ONE WORKER
SPACE IN FRONT OF DRAWER
Other Kitchen Activities
Nonworking Areas
Eating Facilities
.
•
M . imum Areas
8
Cooldns MeSS - S
6
meters
Normal kitchens - 8 to 10 square meters
-Normal kitchens with dining and snack areas -12 to
4sq. m.
Counter
Counter
0
N
8
~
•
Kitchen Arrangement
Relative location of work centers should permit a
continuity of kitchen activities as follows:
o gathering materials needed for the task
o deaning and mixing for initial preparation
o cooking
o serving and storing for future use
o cleaning up
.
Range
o .o
0
0
Counter
Range
Source: Fajardo, Max. Planning and Designers Handbook.
~ ed. Quezon City: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
Review Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 2 : REStDENTIAL 5UlLDINGS
•
~
lance between retr·gerator, sink,
. meas red from the center front of each
•
Six Basic Work Cente rs in the Kitchen
The Sink
The Range
Mixing a rea
Serving area
Reqerator (fu ctions re tated to--s&ofale f:f!inurl~- - Oven (if not an integral part of the range}
•
Three Components of a Kitchen Worlc: Centeer
adequatA! storage space or various items used
adequate counter space for wo to be
accomplished
necessary utilities and facifities
•
Types of Kitchen Floor Plan
erfere with the work triangle and
· ersect by more
G..3
• uch
be in be
12 to2.7 meters a nd the
ree legs should not be mor-e ~wtr.iM1ialle1a.t
0-
.
- - _.,J
-
.
'-- -- ,
Sourer: http://en.wr1cfpedio.org/wfki/Kftchen_ Work_ Triangle
Source: Fajardo, Mm:.
Pfo_nning ond Desi,gne1's
•
The K.it£:he,n Work Center
Planned acco<ding to;
their constituent parts
their proper functions
their ideal relationship to one another
r
Handbook..
ed. 0uezon
City: 5138 ~
A
1996.
U-SHAPED KJTOiE.N
Review Module on Archttectu:rat D ~
Chapter 2: RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
-
r
Source: Fajardo, Max.
Planning and Designers
nd
Handbook. 2 ed. Quezon
City: 5138 Merchandising,
1996.
_,
CD
en
UI
s:
u.
_,
UI
oonu -....
LI EAR KITCHEN
:-~--- -
00
00
WM
'
EJ
oo:
-
•
HIGHEST REACH FOR VERTICAL STORAGE
s.<K
--1
I
I
::
••
""
U)
en
cw ,......,,
_l
EJ
::c
i
0
,.._
- -
0
L-SHAPED KITCHENS
70
Critical Heights and Measurements
wall shelving - maximum 1800 mm high
counter top height - 75mm to 9 mm
hei ht betwee -wall cabinet ancf countertop - 600 mm
.-.- over range and sirilc - m fmum 400 mm high
s - minimum 100 mm
maxlmom 450 mm
ilepth ofbase sfielving - minimum 300 mm
maximum 600 mm
depth of counter top - minimum 400 mm
maxtmum-600 mm
170
80-85
60
TYPICAL CABINET DIMENSIONS ,..
Source: Fajardo, Max. Planning and Designers Handbook.
zid ed. Quezon City: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
~ e w Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 2: RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
!~I I U
LJL_J
25
RANGE GROUP
REF
DISHWASHER GROUP
5.
Bathroom _ _ ..,
A bathroom is a pl-----=--hln
nd poorntne,
hand laundering and infant care and, often as dressing room,
Planning Considerations
•
•
•
•
•
•
Convenience
Arrangement
Illumination
Ventilation
Sound Control
Auxiliary Heat
•
•
•
•
•
Materials
Storage
Mirror
Drying Facilities
Accessibility
Bathroom Cltegories-
i
-
REF
0
atory guest"'hatb._t,y,- two-fixture bath for guest
in varying sizes; minimum area of abo~ .,_.,.,&q¥are
m
Larle compartmenta
45
45
AT 0PENNG SIDE
AT OPENNG SIDE
fl:HIGEAMOR GROUP
b th.:~-.,ant.:e.d.~ .. and
the toilet by partition with or without
additional lavatory
sho;l,er
REFRIGEAATOR GROUP
Source: Fajardo, Max. Planning and Designers Handbook.
2"" ed. Quezon Oty: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
~ three fixtures
---
baffi
no separate compartment and designed for the use
of one
individual at a time
an average area
.70 square meters if with tub
shower
bath-.,.-a,ides an area larger than the
minimum size required for the three basic fixtures
*Bathroom door - minimum 550mm to 600mm
Utility
- minimum 700mm
Review Module on Archtuctural De51gn
Chapter 2: RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
Laundering Includes collection and sorting of dirty clothes,
pre-treating, washing, drying, sprinkling and ironing which
requires a lot of stooping, lifting and carrying.
-r-
1 20
E j .ava tor y
Planning Considerations
•
Arrangement - proper planning and distribution of
the space and facilities including placement and
location of various laundering equipment
• :rrafflc - mlrfhnum passageway width is 1.20 meters
•
Equipment and Facilities - accessible to both working
area of the house and outdoor drying area provided
w ith:
sorting table
heating surface and storage facilities
for soiled clothes
washing supplies and basket
washing machine and dryer
ironing board
undry tray with'lOOiiim depth for
pre-washing soaking
Source: Fajardo, Max.
Planning and Designers
Handbook. z>d ed.
Quezon City: 5138
Merchandising, 1996.
/ : s~s
FIGURE 1 ◄3 DIMENSIONS AT LAVATORY
<r
15
w =--.i
;!-.:~
~
1
C:
II
I!
ll
·
~
I~
185Min.
~
,,. lj
i
i__
'
•
~----•·.a.()-r
Grab bar
•
sorting and pre-heating table or
counter
wash ing machine
laundry tray
dryer
Ironing board
h adjust able height
•
120
l!::::::::,,-J
Soap
I
j
•
I
I~
Work Flow
- - -m,m 600 to 900iiiiil
'
:
standing or hanging bar
:_)~ --- - --- __,
6. Laundry Rooms
R.A!,vtew Module on Architectural Dee.'9"
-
----- ---------------------
Chapter 2: RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
•
•
fitghest shelf is 1.80 meters above the floor
minimum total shelf area f one and two
bedroom house is one square metl!r
for three and four bedroom house, minimum
shelf area is 1.20 square meter
Conve ience as to:
accessibility
Vtsibility
orderliness
·mum use of space
Preservat ion as to:
Pressed condit ion
Freshness (ventilation)
Absence of moth
Free of dust
Against pilfering
APARTMENTS
An apartment is a room or set of rooms fitted especially
with domestic facilities and usually leased as a
well planned apartment maximizes rlvacy and pr 1de
proper circulation within the different spaces p the it.
dall
in.
/
1. Minimum Room Sizes In an
Name of Space
Unit with
Unit with 3
bedrooms
(sqm)
Elements of Closet Storage
Shelves - required 250mm to 300mm depth; f'or linen
ide, 300mm to 400mm is accep a le
Living
Dining
Master Bedroom
Bedroom
Drawers
Poles
Hooks
9.0
10.8
NA
9.0
10.8
7.2
15.3
10.8
10.8
7.2
Special Features
. Uvln1room
•Clothes closet- r besicm-\Jft'lcl dressing room with
standard-depth of 600mm.
strip is to be used,
~ depth is 7-50 mm.
~ Closet - located near entrance doo
ith a total
••tit-at SOOmmto 850mm
·The living room should be the most impressive and
largest of all oomS1Hld should be visible from the
entrance door. The following are the minimum required
furniture:
•
1 couch (0.90 x 2.10 m )
- -.- 2 easy c airs (0.75 x 0.90 me
•
•Bedroom Linen and Bedding Closet
minimum interior dimension of 400mm wide and
~ - - i o a maximum of 600mm
shelves are spaced at 300mm on center vertically
•
1 desk (0.50 x 1.05 m )
1 desk chair (0.45 x 0.45 m)
1--television set (0.40-x 0.80 m)
1 table (0.45 x 0.75 m)
RA!vlt!tW Module on Architectural De61gn
Chapter 2: RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
,n·n
ooms
apartment has two or more bathrooms, one is usually
The following table and chair requirements should be
considered with proper circulation and pattern of
fo d serving:
•
One bedroom, two persons: o. 7S'X 0.90 m
Two bedroom, four persons: o. 75 x 1.00 m
- Three bedroom. six persons: 1.00 x 1.20 m or
L2m ~ n d J
attached to the master bedroom. A powder room
may also be provided instead of a second bathroom.
H. HOTELS
A hotel is a building which is used for the regular
recept ion, accommodation or lodg ng of travellers and
tourists and the-prOYision of sen/tees for a fee.
Oin ing,.Qtairs.:. 0.45 x 0 .45 m
1.
Classification of Hotels
a. Oe Luxe Oass - location and architectural
eatures shall be of In e
ional
ury stanc:tard
b.
Class - location and architectural features
s all be of international first class starfdard
c.
ta.ru:larcLOass- location and architectural
features shall be of ry good standard
conomy C ass - location and architectural
features shall be of-good standard
BalconieS
Balconies, if provided, must be at least 1.S meter
-wide aad ve adequate privacy.
5.
K'rtchens
The basic quence l,fMfrJaierifto
e,
starting froni:the door to
mmg area should be
observed. An average kitchen area
apartment is
9 square meters.
2.
Star Grading System
e crepartment of Tourism has a grading system
or otels ranging.tram one star to five star levels.
6.
Each bedroom should have enough space for two
persons and provide the following furniture:
queen bed for master bedroom
fwo twin beds for each bedroom
•
One dresseT (0:-45 x 1.30 m)
•
One chajr (O;"S x 0.45m)
• ctoset (0.6 x 1.8 to 3.6 m)
- - =-~-
-
The rating for hotel buildings is done using a point
system with 1,000 points being-thEf'highestscore. To
obtain higher star level, the hotel must obtain higher
number of points.
~ - one star (251-400 points)- hotels with limited
range of facilities and services which appeal to
budget minded guests
b.
7.
Bathrooms should be arrangeiftiadc-to-badrto
save cost for piping and maintenance. When an
-
Two star (401 to 550 points) - hotels with
-e)IOainot!d facilities ancftiijtier level of comfort
which appeal to guests seeking more than basic
accommodation
Revtew Module on Archtuctural Design
Chapter 2: RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
C.
Three star (551 to 700 points) - hotels t nat offer
a ery good ievel of accommodation with more
spacious public areas, higher quality facilities, and
a greater range of services
d. Four star (701 t o 850 points) - upscale hotels
with refined accommodation, responsive
services, and extensive array of facilities
e. Five Star (851 to 1,000 points) - luxurious and
sophisticated hotels with world class facilities and
meticulous services ex
ing all guiSt
expectatioos
The crlteria1'o r the hotel rating include the quality of
bedrooms, bathrooms, amenities, public areas, arrival &
departure area, food & beverage, and business practices.
.
2. Required Faciities for Department of Tourism (DOT) Accreditation
First Class
Standard
Economy
Facilities
De Luxe
Bedroom
18sqm
18sqm
25sqm
2Ssqm
size of Room
ineluding
ba throom
per2'0 ,.
Su ite
lr - 1 per30
rooms
rooms
1
1 call bell
1
Communicatioir
f telephone ~
per
room
telephone
telephone
per room w/
per room
per room
extension at
-
bathroom
Hot water supply
✓
✓
-
-
✓
✓
-
-
at bathroom
Radio, TV, &
re layed or pipedin music
Facilities
Refrigerator &
mini-bar
Reception
Customer
Lounge
Porter Service
Foreign
Exchange
Counter
Mailing Facilities
Telephone with
Long Distance
Calls
Luggage room
and Safety box
Telex & facsimile
Food & Beverage
Coffee Shop
Specialty dining/
restaurant
Bar
Recreational
Swimming Pool
Tennis/Golf/
Squash/ Gym
Live
entertainment
Engineering
De Luxe
Air condif ning*
Centralized
for tlie whole
1
~
uitding
First Class
Standard
Economy
✓
-
-
-
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
-
-
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
-
-
✓
✓
✓
-
-
✓
✓
✓
-
-
At least
75% of the
rooms
At least
I
All private
& public
rooms
-
-
Review Module on Architectural Design
-
50% of """'\,
the rooms I
c~
If
1,
De luxe
Facllttfes
1,
1,
1:
I
Chapter 2: RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
Em~rgency
Power
Gen~ral FacHities
Common
Outdoor Area
✓
First Class
Standard
✓
✓
✓
-
✓
• In planning traffic circulation, there should be no
mingling of the Front House services with those of
the Back House.-
-
3. Hotel Guest Registration
- should be located visibly from the hotel lobby
- size is determined by the hotel size
Economy
.
i:= three (3) registration
clerks
100 to 200 rooms= one (1) or at most two (2)
registration clerks
,:,------1-608 roonrtiote
Conference
room/banquet
hall/private
dining room
Barber shop &
beauty parlor
Travel Agency
Counter
Sundries Shop
Medical Service
✓
-
-
0
✓
✓
-
-
✓
✓
-
-
✓
✓
Olnlcw lth
urse and
doctor on call
Airport Transfer
✓
✓
tliruc w ifh
nurse and
doctor on
call
✓
✓
Nurse on
duty and
doctor on
call
✓
Doctor ofl
calf
...·--
✓
'2. Two categories of service
•
Reception
=
level
Front of the house - comprises every area that the
guest will see (i.e. lobbies, dining space, rest rooms,
passenger elevators, etc.)
Back oft house -general services area which is the
most critical part of the plan; absorbs all orders and
demands making everything possible
·-f
Audit
9_-.. !... r
~
✓
·atr mndfflonln8 'is riot"'iequired for hotels locatecr-3,000-feet above sea
•
J:!,I
Banquet Restaurant •
Cashier
Mgr.
IConf. Rm Sales
:I
\
--'-l
~
lReglstnltion & Cashie~
...
~
,,
-l
L....J L....I •
f \
I
I
.\l
~
t
Sat. deposit and exam.
Source: Fajardo, Max. Planning and Designers Handbook.
z'd ed. Quezon City: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
4. Administrative Area
•
must be accessible to ttie putilic
•
deals with guests seeking arrangements
Review Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 2: RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
5. lobby
•
necessary for all hotels
• the bigger the hotel, the bigger tile lobby
•
establishes the mood for the hotel; creates proper
ambience
6.
JOO
Elevator
•
•
•
7.
BED
must be visible ilnfflediately from the en nee or
from registraflon area
must be located ina SROrtest walking ~ance of the
guests
service elevatot'Should be separateand·apart from
the auest elevator
Guest Floor Corridor
•
no guest rqom should be placed opposite the
e evator
corridor length aes~1a1n.-SO
rs Ion
normally,
t
.80
to
2.00
meters
corridor
width is
•
adequate
setback
doors by 300 to 600 mm to give each room•
entrance a feeling of privacy and individuality
Types of Room
- .....-.--.,,n bedcfed room = most common
single-occupancy room
studio room or suite
ize of Bed
- Single bed = 1.05 meter ide
Fttlrsize bed = 1.35 meter wide
- Queen-size bed = 1.50 meter wide
·ns size bed = 1.80 meter wide
- Standard Bed Length = 1.95 meter long
•
770 - - - -- - -- SINGLE BED GUl!ST ROOM
_ _ _ __
---380
Q
350 _ ____
8ED
□
1
9EO
•
•
---~
TWIN BEDDED GUEST ROOM
Review Module on Archluctural Design . -
Chapter 2 : RESIDENTIAL 6UILDINGS
•
•
Guest room space
General service space
I.
A mot el or a motorist hotel is any structure with several separate
units primarily located along t he highway with individual or common
parking space at which motorists may obtain lodging and, in some
instances, meals.
16S _ L _
-ha------700
~
IIED SEAT
0 ............. ............'.
go ,
.... .. ... .. ..... ... .... .. ...•
DOUBLE BEDDED GUEST ROOM
w
BED SEAT
I. Esttmati"I Area for Meetln1 or Banqueting Space
• 4.60 sq. m . per stanalng person
J.O 1.4 sq. m. per person seated at a table
0.83 sq. m . per person seated for a seminar
•
Foyer or pre-banquet space is 25% of actual Bining
~
I
8
Sou~: Fajardo, Max. Planning and Designers Handbook.
Z-- ed. Quezon City: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
I
~
~
•
DD
CJ .
J
...
~
<h
0
lll
. ~
9. Grouping of Hotel Spaces According to Function
•
•
•
•
Public space
Concession space
Sub rental space
Food and beverage service area
MOTEL ROOMS
Source: Fajardo, Max. Planning and Designers Handbook.
2"" ed. Quezon City: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
RA!!Yiew Module on Archltectural Design
Chapter 2: RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
1.
Types of Motels
•
City Motel - built in town intended for business
t raders
•
Motor Anne1e - adjoins an existing hotel in ttle city
Highway M otel - provides room side parking for
•
travellers
•
location
shall be located alOfll"Urdose to hiltlways or
major transportation route
•
Provide 1 parking slot for each room
J.
Minimum Design Requirements for DOT Accreditation
Z.
3. Parking Slot Requirement
Size
inimum ten (10) units each provided with
attachec:Hoii . and bathroom-wi cold and hot
APARTELS
An apartel is any building containing several independent
furnished or semi-furnished apartments, regularly leased to
tourists and travellers for dwelling on a more or less long
term basis and offering basic services to its tenants similar to
hotels. Apartels may also be rated using the star grading
system similar to otels, with the addition of theA}tc:hen
IOunge areas .as part of the criteria.
1.
Minimum Design Requirements for DOT Accreditation
•
•
mmIm
25 lettable apartments each rovided
witlt livlefrii@ dining areas, kitchen an
bedrooms with attachecttoilet and bath
Bedroo
shaH be we ventilated; if possible, fully air
conditioned or equipped with an electric fan
•
shall have-a garage or a common parlcing space
fer-.,ests' veh · e
an emergency clinic sh~ uld be provided
may se
f, d and drinks as guests'
tion or
install such other special facilities s deemed
necessary for: business •
-
Signboard
shall be kept and displayed in a conspicuous
place outside the EStablishment
Size
2.
Facilities
whenever possible, an elevator shall be provided
lftfie tiul Ing is more t l'\an t tiree (3) storeys
an emergenGy clinic should be provided
If wfth-'Tnore than 100
rtments, rlgular
services of a-house.physician shall be secured
A reasonab Slzect and fumlsfie lounge ad
reception counter_sball be provided
Parking Slot Requirements
provide 1 car slot for every 5 unltS
provide 1 bu~ parking slot for every 60 units
Rsvtew Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 2 : RESIDENTIAL BUILDINGS
It. PENSION HOUSES
A pension house is a private or family-operated tourist
boarding house, guest house, or lodging house employing
non-pro ssion I dom stlc helpers regularly catering to
tourists and travellers. It contains independent lettable
rooms with common facilities such as toilets, bathrooms,
dining rooms, and/or kitchen.
1. Minimum Requirements for DOT Accreditation
•
Size
a pension house shall have at le
5 ettabl
r-o ms
•
Living Room
There shall be a furnished lounge or living room
commensurate with the size of the pension
house where guests may receive visitors, watch
television, or read
•
Dining Room
Jhere shall be a dining room for the common u!le
of guests
2. Parking Slot Requirement
provide 1 car slot for every 20 beds
Facifft
Bedrt,o~ shalt be-provided with sOfflclent
number of comfortable beds commensurate with
the sae of the room
Each room shall have adequate lflht 1lf'ld
ventilation and shall be equippea with at least
one electr ic fan, writing table, closet, a water jdi
with glasses proportionate to the number of beds
Rooms shall be clean, presentable, and furnished
to depjct t he atmosphe e of a Filipino fiome
Common Toilet and Bathroom-
-
There shall be at least 1 toilet anij 1
bathroom/shower for every 5 guests
- 4 ! -eWRe,n
l.
There shall be adequate supply of clean linen,
tow~ls, soap, and t issue~r
Review Module on Architectural Design
Char-,ter 3:
EDUCATIONAL &
RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
Review Module on Architectural Deeign
Chapter 3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILl11E5
Group C Is defined as Educational and Recreation
Occupancies by the Code. However, there are also
educational buildings that can be found under Group E or
Business & Mercantile Occupancies:
c. Division E-2
• Conditional use: colleges and universities,
vocational and technical school
d. Division E-3
•
Principal use: all permitted uses for
Divisions C-1 and C-2, university
complexes
A. DEFINITION
Educational R creation Facilities involve
building / structure used for instruction, education, or recreation.
8. OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATIONS
1. PD 1096:
NATIONAL BUILDING CODE
M jority of Educational and Recreation Facilities belong to
GROUP C : DUCA
AND RECREATION. Group C Incl es
building us d fot.JadlOl)lor d11y car purposes more than
ight hours per week:, Involving assemblage for instruction,
ducat ion, or r creation, and not classed In Group I or in
Di I ions 1 nd 2 of Group H Occupancies.
a. Division C-1
Schools, colleges, semtnar/workshtp
facilities, training centers, libraries,
museums
b. Division C-2
•
Princlp I: amusement halls & parlor
bHflard halls, pool rooms, bowling alleys
and golf clubhouses, dancing schools,
disco pads, dance and amusement halls
•
Accessory: government centers,
colleges, universities, professional
schools, vocational and trade schools,
general hospitals and medical
centers, scientific, cultural and
academic centers, convention
centers, religious structures,
museums, embassies, student
housing
2. RA 9514: FIRE CODE OF THE PHILIPPINES
Belongs to Dh,ision 9: EDUCATIONAL OCCUPANCIES
a. Buildings or portions thereof used for the
gathering of groups ifX (6) or morw-persons
for purposes of Instruction
b. nursery schools, kindergartens, day care
facilities, and other schools whose purpose Is
primarily educational even though the
children are of pre-school age
ZONING CLASSIFICATIONS
1. Gt (General Institution I} - •nm1Unity to n tional vel of
=-institutional use or occupancy, characterized malnly as a lowrise, medium rise or high-rise building/structure for
educational, training and related activities, e.g. schools and
related facilities and the like.
2. C-2 (Commerclat 2 or Medium Commercial)
I or
ity v o commerc use or occupancv, characterized
ma nty as medium-rise burlding/structure for medium to high
intensity commercial/trade, service and business activities,
C.
~
Review Module on Archtuctural Deelgn
cdep
Chapter 3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES.
3.
C-3 (Commercial lhree or Metropolitan Commerdal) means a
metropolitan level of commercial use/occupancy,
characterized mainly as a medium rise to high-rise building
structure for high to very high intensity commercial/trade,
service and business activities
D. DEVELOPMENT CONTROLS
1.
Type of
Building
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-1 with
sprinkler
& firewall
C-2 with
sprinkler
& firewall
C-3 with
sprinkler
& firewall
Maximum Total Gross Floor Area (Table Vll.1 of PD 1096)
Interior/
Inside/
Corner
Through
CornerCorner
Rear Lot
Regular
Lot
Lot
Through
Lot
& End
Lot
Lot
abutting
Lot
3 or
Sx80%
12x80%
30x80%
Sx85%
Sx75%
12x75%
30x75%
Sx85%
Sx80%
12x80%
30x80%
Sx90%
Sx80%
12x80%
30x80%
Sx90%
Sx90%
12x90%
30x90%
Sx95%
more
streets,
rivers,
etc.
Sx90%
12x90%
30x90%
Sx95%
2.
Building Height Limit (Table Vll.2 of PD 1096)
BUILDING HEIGHT OR
LIMIT
Character of
Type of
Use
Building/
or Occupancy
Structure
No. of
allowable
Meters
storeys/floors
above
above
highest
established
grade
grade
Commercial 1
(C-1)
COMMERCIAL
Commercial 2
(C-2)
Commercial 3
(C-3)
INSTITUTIONAL
3-5
6
16-60
10.0015.00
18.00
48.00180.00
15.00 meters (or must
follow the duly approved
12x85%
12x85%
12x90%
12x90%
12x95%
12x95%
BHL in the major zone it is
part of)
30x85%
30x85%
30x90%
30x90%
30x95%
30x95%
Review Module on Archiuctural De&Ien -
Chapter 3 : EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
4.
3.
Minimum Parking Requirements (Table Vll.4 of PD 1096)
Aefae.112 Uses or
of ~orl\,<peof
Mnlnun Requl~ Partd'llSlot, Partd,wArea and
lcal,.Sfa:e Requlrerrents
l!Ulcl~
Floor to Lot Area Ratio (Table VII.G.1 of PD 1096)
Type of
Building/Structure
Commercial 1 (C-1)
a. One (lJ aff--sbeet a m ~ par1a,.s1at fi:ll'~ry
P\.tJlic Bement.rv.
Sau Ida V, 'IIOCatiana and
trade school (C3)
ten(JQ da&0011l5,
b. one (1) off!RRCM/(orclf-street) J)a5,Ser8erloadire
space that can
odab::! ~ • a d
aa:oe,,,
Commercial 2 (C-2)
Secordary, vocational and
~
a. oe Cl) c:arstotu~ fhle CS) Jc1551mis;
Institutional (GI)
S.
and
~ (G )
Duly Approved
Zoning
Maximum
Allowable
PSO
C-1 w/o firewall
C-1 w/ firewall
C-2 w/o firewall
C-2 w/ firewall
C-3 w/o firewall
C-3 w/firewall
UTS w/o firewall
UTS w/ firewall
70
80
75
85
80
90
space that car, ax:ot 111 w:xlate lVliO (2) queued
j~
/shuttle slots;
c. one(l)school busslotforeverytlM:>hu'ldred ~
students.
a One (1) carslotforeverytt.-ee (3) dassrooms;
b. one (1) off-RfON(orclf-street) passerger loadire
space that can axtll 111 w:xJate tlM:> (2) queued
·eepney/stutle slots;
c. one ( 1) school bus slot for every one hu1dred
(l(Qstudents.
2.50
Maximum Allowable PSO, ISA, USA, and TOSL expressed in
% of the Total Lot Area (Table Vlll.1 of PD 1096)
b. one (1) clf-RRON(orclf-street) passerger loadire
P\jJli;(dl.
9.00 up to 34.00
(at a 60-storey or 180.00m BHL)
a One tl) car stotforeve,yffile (S) dassroom;;
trade schad (G)
3.60 up to 9.00
(at a 15-st orey or 45.00m BHL)
Commercial 3 (C-3)
PrMRBes,aita.,,
1. 70 up to 3.00
(at a 5-storey or 15.00m BHL)
·eepney/shuttie ots.
b. one (1) off-RRON(orclf-street) passerger loadire
space that can aa:0111 , cdate MO (2) queued
sh.ittle slots;
c. one (l) school bus slotfareYerVone tu'ldred
FLAR DESIGNATION/RIGHTS
so
60
Maximum
Allowable
ISA (paved
open spaces)
20
Minimum
USA
(unpaved
open spaces)
10
10
20
10
15
5
40
30
10
5
TOSL
(ISA
+USA}
s
s
s
30
20
25
15
20
10
10
10
40
• Front yards abutting RROW are not to be used for long term off-
street parktng
Review Module on Architectural Deelgn
so
Chapter 3· EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
6. M inimum Setbacks {Table Vlll.3 of PD 1096)
RROWWidth
{meters)
30 & above
25 to 29
20 to 24
10 to 19
Below 10
PARAMETERS
Front (meters)
Side (meters)
Rear (meters)
8
6
5
5
5
5
3
3
2
2
5
3
M inimum Stair Width
2
2
r~ um
r
PD 1096 and RA 9514
Ceiling Heights
- W ith Natural vent ilation: not less than 2.70 meters
- With Artificia l ventilation:
•
st
-
r=:.·
nd
storey: 2.40 m eters
Succeeding sto reys: 2.10 met ers
Mezzanine floors: 1.8 m eters
Air Space Requirements in determ ining sizes of
· U..00 cu. M of air space per person
r
....
~
-
1.8
Shops, Laboratories, Vocational
Nurseries tor- children
-
4.6
3.25_ _ _,
-
1.9
-
4.6
I
3.3
-
Riser Height
1.83 m
,__
1.12 met ers for
occupant load<
2,000
1.42 meters for
occupant load >=
2,000
180mmJ
___
250mm
280mm
1- 10 occupants
1
2
11-499 occupants
2
2
500-999 occupant s
3
3
1,000 or more occupants
Maximum Distance to Exits
(Educational Facilities)
4
45 m
(w/o sprinkler)
46 meters
(w/o sprinkler)
Maximum Distance t o Exits
(Child Day care Centers)
60 meters
(w/ sprinkler)
45 m
(w/o sprinkJer)
60 meters
(w/ sprinkler)
Minimum Tr'lad Depth
um Occupant Load
'-11551_,. ••
·-
..
RA 9514
PD 1096
PAMMETERS
. .
1.lm
_;,
Number of Exits
1 storey: not less than 2. 70 meters
2
·RA9514
0. 75 m for occupant
load less than 10
0.9 m for occupant
load of 50 or less
1.1 m for occupant
load more than SD
200 mm
,
3
E. GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
l.
1 Minimum Corridor Width
PD 1096
~
4
61 meters
(w/ sprinlde_r)
~
~
~
room door
.
-
-
"'30.5 m from any-
s.s1nfiomarrv
point in a room
...leeping room ""; .
,- 15.ilS mfrom an,
_.apoint in a
Module on Archttectural Design
Chapter 3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
2.
2010 Educational Facilities Manual by the Department of
Education
M inimum
dimensions of a
Shall be properly oriented with regards
Layout
to air current, natural light, heat from
the sun, utility of plants and ground,
7 m x 9 m for majority of school building
and advantageous views
types•
Recommended
classroom
M inimum Space
Placement &
Classroom
1.4 sqm per place
Orientation
Requirements
Northwest-west to southeast-east axial
direction to take advantage of the solar
path and prevailing winds
NWW
'
place
Computer
1.4 sqm per place
Room
Minimum of 10
N
--W~E
s"'
computers
Shall be air-
Library
.
~
SEE
conditioned
Minimum
m ~ one storey buildillgs
2.4 sqm per place
Distances
10 m between two storey buildings
Capacity = 10% of
between
enrolled studen
Size shall not
than J classroom
buildings
10 m between building-and a front gate
Minimum area
Shall be at least 10% of the room area,
of windows
except for toilets which shall not be less
ttian 1/20 of room area or 240 square
Admin Office
5 sqm per place
Clinic
28sqm gross
Guidance
28 sqmgross
Room
mHttmeters
Minimum ceilin
2. 7 m for narurattv ventilated roomt
height
2A m-for artiftciatly venttlatecf rooms
No. of Exit Doors
At least 2 are-required if the number of
:-room occupants ts over5€k
Review Module on Architectural Deeign
Chapter :3: EDUCATIO NAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITTES
M inimum Door
Width
Minim
m Door
900 mm (for classrooms, laboratories,
and other student rooms)
Different COMPONENTS constituting EDUCATIONAl
2.
FAOLmES:
2.1 meters (for classrooms,
height
laboratories, and other student rooms)
Door Shutters
Shall swing out at least 90 degrees and
sh II not exceed 1.2 meters in width
•
schooJ sites
•
school bundlngs
e--
school furniture and equipment and-
•
instructional materials
Minimum
Corridor Width
Minimum width
1.1 m for occupants 50 or less
of stairways
1.S.m for occupants more than SO
Maximum Riser
200 mm
3. Types
a. Elementary School- Provides bask: Jearnin& for children
Programs for elementary grades are usually grouped into:
• ~liararv grades - the first four grades where the
young learner develops not only mentally, but also
Height
physically, socially and emotionally.
Minimum Tread
•
250 mm
grades where the major emphasis are on intellectual
Depth
Handrails
development and on development of desirable social
Shall be provided on each side of every
stairway having more than 4 steps
* Min. dimensions of classroom vary for other types of school
skills, habits and attrtudes.
b. Secondary schools-provide secondary general educat ion
for all; prepares gifted students for college and provides
building. See manual for detailed reference.
F. EDUCATIONAL FAOUTIES (GRADE SCHOOL AND HIGH SCHOOL)
1.
Intermediate grades - usually the fifth and sixth
Definitions
a. all physical property of a school, consisting of the
ounds, buildings, ancf various faciliti within the school
stcte the school buildings.
,,.....
_..._
b.
____
practical preparation for the problem of life that will
confront those who do not attend college.
•
There are many types of secondary schools
aeneral hi&h
comprehensive high schoot: and
vocational - technical four-yur high school.
Review Modu"5 on Archrtectural Dee'en
Chapter 3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
CONCEPT OF LINKAGES OF OPEN SPACE ENHANCES THE
3. Site Pla nning
• _rnc,,...5 Pi.an,ntt'1a
QUALITY OF CAMPUS SPACE
pus
derived from Italian word "CAMPO"
meaning open space.
De eloped from the essence of campus design: D81GNING
OUTSIDE r
ning:
3.1 Site Zoning
a. Functional
•
a.
The outdoor space precedes the design of the buildings
i.e. Aciadem· - Classrooms, laj)oratories,
b.
Building design evolves out of outdoor space
administrati e offices
c.
Interior space is cent ered around indoor -outdoor space
such as an atrium
Purpose of the open space is to offer a venue for free discourse
- --- Am:Ulafy - Ctiapel, atidltorium
•
services- workshop, motorpoo
•
Partition functional zones and establish routine paths
which is t he lifeline of t he campus. Hence, most campus plans
e around the concepts of:
re
Zone site according to functions
a. HIERARCHY OE.OPENS
between them
•
Keep distances between
E-4ntended'to service
hott, and access
to negotiate.
hierarchy of free discourse as follows:
An OVAL or CAMPUS PARK for campus-w ide
discourse i.e. Commencement Exercises
A QUADRANGLE for collegiate or inter-unit activTties
Public/Private
•
to maintain control and restrictions over the public's
interference with the school's private activities.
A BUILOJNG OPEN COURT or an ATRIUM for class or
organizational interactions, and
81.J!LOING LOBBIES or CORRIDORS or NOOKS for more
Hazardous/Non-l'tazaffious
•
grade school children-a
sometimes incapable of
discerning places and activities that are dangerous or
personal exchanges.
harmful tathe
CONCEPT OF THE HIERARCHY OF OPEN SPACE ENHANCES THE
ays and par
VAIUETY OF CAMPUS SPACE.
1
GES1)F OPEN SPACE-intetided to string together
building outdoors and site elements through greenbelts,
waterscapes and other open space features.
reas, and delivery service
areas should be off-limits to the children.
•
Other potentially hazardous places on site
embankments, garbage disposal areas, compost pit~
L - --
ponds or lagoons, terraces and long eps
Review Module on Architectural Design
•
Chapter 3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
~iiellatiiOR of earthquake and fire evacuation/
c.
Collecto r walks should be provided and arranged to
permit pedestrians to exit vehicle areas as direcUv -as
rescue sites outsides the buildings.
- -- possible.
3
Circu a ion Systems
ta ion mun-be
a.
•
continuous from points of access to and through the
3.4 Walkways
•
a. Path'9te.xturetHardsca,e and Softsape}
-b. Directionality - cotors, shapes, graphic, sigfiages
boild~
•
designed as aft integrated system
b . Separation of different types of traffic is recommended for
safety and efficient movement
•
Cross uaffic between pec:lestilin and vehicles hould
be.elil"QJnated oi minimized
•
c.
Do not lli&ect or ,araflet play areas with driveways
tntl:gi ation ot vehicular access iASide the site
•
to eliminate on-street loading and parking that can
cause congestion that expose the children to street
-hazards. This requires tfii provision of driveways and
3.5 Structures
a. Building Zoning
•
Functional Zoning
Facility must have a functional layout where private
and public spaces aredistiogwishable worn.each
other.
• VertJcat Zoning
For multi-story facilities, m
public usage are
assigned to ~
, white upper ftoors are
consequ en kept private b¥ introd~ion of stairs
and ramps.
pa~ing lots inside the site.
•
keep driveways and parking facilities to the minimum
and arrange them so as to prevent vehicular flow
from crisscrossing excessively w ith pedestrian flow.
Sensory stimulation through
b. Circulation
•
Form and Hierarchy
employ corridors t
are simple, short smooth and
safe.
•
3 types of-automobile traffic normally found on school
_ ,..·- . tac:wty, student, no-visitor or parent.
b. Daytime visitor parking taking precedence over faculty
a.
and student-
•
Location and distribution of Stairs and Ramps
corresponds to the requirements of convenience and
routine movements of school children as well as
compliance with building codes
Accessibility compliance
Provisions of ramps to attow-access for the disabled
from the street to the ground ftoor.
~view Module on Arctittecturail Design . -
Chapter 3: EDUCATIONAC & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
a knum slope of 8% or gradient of 1:12
i.
Ii.
iii.
Single runs at a maximum of 6:00meters
For yo
s.choolchlldren, deally of
rubberized floor finish, with plastic raillnp
for safety.
•
Emergency Access and Egress
3.6 l andsca ping
a. Gardens and playgrounds - design to give utmost freedom to
enjoy and appreciate nature while ensuring safety and security.
4. Design Criteria
a. General Purpose Teaching Areas
i. Standard classrooms
ii. Supplementary classrooms
iii. Extra large classrooms
iv. Rooms for special courses
v. Rooms for teaching languages and social studies
vi. Language labs
vii. Rooms for teaching materials, maps, and other ancillary
rooms
b. Softscape - shade trees, ornamental trees, shrubs, vines and
0
r=J
grass.
•
-
Hardy covers and shrubs for site partitioning or
landscape massing for visual appreciation
•
Trees
Larae trees for sfiade and screentng but should not be
accessible to schoolchildren to prevent climbing
0
hazard
Small trees with minimum climbing hazard to form
standa rd classroom
aqu41 or reca.nguler 86'"7
with furndut• ,n rows
and freely a rran ged furniture
p art of play.
c.
Hardscape- for outdoor corridors, st eps and ramps with
provisions for safety railings
•
Gr·adeschoolers - play equipment and site furniture may
of hard pl
le (polysterene) on rubberized floorln
32- 40 placea
lloom• end • - • for . ....,.al-purpoM teaching
Source: Nt u/ert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Data. 3'd ed. Oxford:
Blackwell Sc/Mee Ltd, 2000.
R.vtew Module on A r c hlt4tctur• I D eelen
30-3& placH
Chapter 3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
Home Economics;
Industrial rts/Shop Building:
Classroom height:
Classes size:
Basic Facilities:
*Acoustical Control ls a Fundamental Concern
-Children's voices naturally high-pitched and many activities
whether quiet or noisy takes place ioside the rooms.
- carpeted floor recommended
- important to have floors ttiat can be easily cleaned.
- area rugs- non slip backing to prevent inj ury.
7mx9m.
9mx12
186sqm
4meters
40-50 students
Ubrary, playground,
laboratory, and guidance
facmt1es.
Secondary
Classrooms d im ension:
Classes size:
Trade Industrial School
Industrial Electricity:
Furniture and Cabinet Making:
Construction:
Sheet M etal Works and Welding:
Retated Subjects:
Classroom Size;
Class size:
Light Machfnery & Equipment Room
Heavy Mac:hJnery Bi Equipment Room
a. Size
aass Size: 15 to 23 children with one teacher and an
assistant teacher.
instructional area min. space:
48 square meters.
1m 9m.
40-students
b. Planning considerations:
classroom environment shall promote conducive
atmosphere leading towards the educational obj ectives.
classroom arrangemen -foster child' concept of space
and orderliness
separate tutoring booth for individual Instructions and for
teacher interaction.
high iililifii~ voices of the school c ildren must be
considered
ideal recommended helgtit for any display is 1.00m or it
to be within children's normal range-of awareness.
(1.38m is beyond clllld's awareness).
35 students
85 sqm/student
420 sqm/student
5. fartr &tucalialt-,icllltles Classroom
Space Requirements for early education facilities classroom
Minimum Sqft/student Optimum
50 sqft (4.6Ssqm)
35 sqft (3.25sqm)
tnfant
50 sqft (4.6Ssqm)
35 sqft (3.25sqm)
Toddlers
60
sqft(5.57sqm)
35 sqft (3.25sqm)
Pre-school
Mmery School
~
~
c. Space Requirements:
a. General Area
b. The Block Area
c. Manipulative Toy Area
d. Reading and Listening Area
e. Doll and Housekeeping Area
f. Art Area
Review Module on Architectural Design -
Chapter 3 : EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACIUTIE5
g Tuton
h. Toi t
,. 0
7.
c. E ementary sc hoo s - f orst udint use
Urinals
Lavatories
Water Closets
Minimum Plumbl"I Facilities (from the National Plumbing
Code of the Philippines)
Urinals
Female
1: 1-15
2: 16-35
3: 16-35
3: 36-55
4: 36-55
Over 55, add 1 fixture for
ersons
1
~ -
Male
1 per 30
Female
1 per 25
1 per 35
Male
1 per
35
Female
1 per
35
Drinking
Fountain
1 per 75
Lavatories
--ritr Male
1 per 40
Female
1 per 40
(
d. Secondary schools, colleges, universities - for student use
Drinking
Water Closets
Urinals
Lavatories
Fountain
Male
1 per 35 Male
Female
1 per 75
Female
1 per40 1 per 30
1 per
1 per
40
30
b. ·- · _" Sc:hoots - for student use
Water Closets
Mate
1: 1-20
2: 21-50
Female
1: 1-20
2: 21-50
Over 50, add 1
fixture for each
additional SO
persons
Lavatories
Male
1:1-25
2:26-50
Female
1:1-25
2:26-50
Over 50, add 1
fixture for each
additional 50
persons
Drinking
Fountain
1 per 75
8.
Indoor Environmental Factors
a. Energy Efficiency
b. lmfoor Air Quality
Indoor Visuat Quality
•
Quantity of Light
• natural illumination - design and size of windows
• Condition of classroom - paint color
• Type of building - (one-storey or two-storey)
• Climate conditions
• CeiHng Height
c.
•
Day lighting •
Proper orientation of school buildings to provide
adequate indirect daylight for classrooms
Bilateral fene ation to cure daylight from
both left and right sides of the dassrooms
Review Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 3 : EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
•
Making classroom windows wide, low-silled, and
high-topped to insure maximum daylight
illumination
•
Using proper combination and intensity of colors
in classrooms and on facilities to provide proper
brightness-contrast
•
Provide proper shading to avoid glare inside the
classrooms
Length of classroom should be limited to 9
meters so
t the board should be clearly visibl
up to the Jast Fow seat
•
Lighting Levels
llluminance
Area
(Lux)
Classrooms
Technlcil Drawing Room
-
Computer Practice Room
d. Thermal comfort
e. Indoor Aural Quality
,_
300
750
300
TABLE 1-1 WORKING HEIGHTS ,oR ELEMENTARY ANO
SECONDARY SCHOOL CH~EN (Centimeters)
KINDERFACILITIES
ELEMENTARY
GARTE N Grade 1-111 Gtade1V-VI
120
130
60
65
Cabinet top(Pupil max.) 120
25
Chairs and bench
Chalk board bottom
50
60
Counter cafeteria
Counter dass room
work standing
60
Desk and table classroom 40
Desk typing
Doorknob
60
Drinking fountain
60
55
Lavatory and sink
65
Light and switches
Mirror lower edge
80
50
Hand rail
100
Shelf. hat and books
60
Drawing tables
Table and bench
60
work standing
170
Tack board top
Urinal bottom
25
Water closet (seat)
70
Window ledae (max)
135
27
60
70
Cabinet display top
Cabinet display bottom
-
65
50
80
65
60
85
85
60
110
80
HIGHSCHOOl
Junb S.niot
175
250
75
150
30
70
85
90
180
200
la
80
90
100
75
55
85
65
90
85
85
65
90
90
.
70
90
100
80
130
85
185
85
80
85
70
65
95
100
85
110
120
88
120
130
87
150
85
145
87
90
,
70
200
80
200
10-20
10-20
27
75
30
80
85
200
90
200
10-50 10-50
35
85
35
100
Source: Fajardo, Max. Planning and Designers Handbook. 2"" ed.
Quezon City: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
Review Module on Architectural Deeign -
Chapter 3 : EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
8E.AT HEIGHT
8½;•17
UNI T
w ....
0
50"
H
50"
LAVOUT
lilt S2''
8
54"
OE8t<
UNIT
Wa4"
w ~•"
o ,r
D 311,.
H
ao·
M 21"-29"
COMBINATION 8TUOV
TABLET ARM CHAI,.
SMITH SYSTEM
~--
TOl9 OESI<
&MITH&vaTEM
.ci
1
CHA_,.
w,..
0 20''
M 24"-a0"
OPEN FRONT OESK
ANO CHAIR
8MITM8vaTEM
.............---.,,,,
------CIMIOII
UNT
W 24•
D !O"
H 30"
LMOOT
IU2"
• !II"
COMBINATION STUDY
TOPOE8K
SMITH SYSTEM
"SCHOOL FURNITUR£"
Source: Architectural Graphic Standards. New York City: John Wiley & Sons, Inc, 2000.
Review Module on Architectural Deeign
Chapter :3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
10. School Recreational Facilities
Public libraries - provide communities with a w ide choice
b.
of more general literature and other information media,
o Third Grades: Slides and tunnels, swlnp,
a.
enclosed forts, climbers and steppers, hopscotch,
oursquare, kickball
c.
3. Facilities
a. Inside Controlled Areas
Secondary t evel: Softball, baseball, football, touch football,
c.
Specialist libraries- collection of literature and media in
limited subject area and often have limited access.
Fourt to Seventh Grades: Climbers and jung1e gyms,
informal group games, little league ball, softball, soccer,
basket ba ll, adventure playgrounds
b.
w ith as much as possible displayed on open shelves.
soccer, basket ball, volleyball, tennis, track and field events,
physical fitness workout course.
•
Reading room information
•
Bibliographies
•
Online catalogue terminals
•
Issue and return of books which can only be used in the
reading room
6. LIBRARIES
A library is an organized collection of resources made accessible to a
•
Copying equipment (in a separate room)
defined community for reference or borrowing. It provides physical or
•
Open access bookshelves
digital access to material, and may be a physical building or room, or a
•
Work spaces
virtual space, o r both.
•
Open access book stack
1. Location: Libraries should be centrally located where it will be
accessible
the iargest'number o f potential reader
nd
b.
Outside Controlled area
•
counter
· formation- seekers.
•
Toilets
•
Cafeteria
MINll!mlc l.ibraries- obtain, collect and store literature for
•
Newspaper reading area
education and research purposes and are usually open to
•
Exhibition room
l
a.
Cloakrooms, briefcase and coat lockers/ baggage
the 8111MmidptlUll"'-!i
Review Module on Architectural Deeign
Cha~r 3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
•
OU
nc room s (possibly for use
urs)
J
•
In
•
Card
rofic.he indices
•
Area
M inimum
Height (cm)
Functional
Max Height
(cm)
Book Stack
Stacks with lights at right angle to
ranges
225
255
250
260
Stacks with light on range tops
functioning by ceiling reflection
270
285
Large Reading rooms over 30m long
broken by screen or bookcase
285
315
250
285
~5
550
c tal gue terminals
•
•
Clear Ceiling Heights
Co 1ecti n area for ordered
reserwd books
4. s~ Requirements
Reading areas under 10 sqm individual
seating on a large area
a.
S ace for Books
ProvisK>n for enough book shelving to plan for 20
~ anticipated growth.
'"
Jta of each shelf for future expansion.
Spacing and length of column has a greater effect on
$tGI'~
rred distance is multiple
of 1.00m.
IS a constant number of books for a 1.00m of
@
■1 ■lull■N fer ............_
book shehfes
W'c:ulillllll'1 Routes
ts 1.20 meters wide
Clear spaces between
bookshelves should be 1.30 to
Source: Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Data. r1 ed. Oxford:
Blackwell Science Ltd, 2000.
Review Moc::lule on Architectural Deelgn
Chapter 3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
b. Space for Readers
2.80-3.25sqm per adult reader
1.80 sqm per child
c. Space for Staff
9 sq m. per staff member (space for desk, chai ,
......
.....,._........
L- - - • E=:
~....,......
r - - ----i
I
I
7
IH>ie
i
I
I
FI
2 Sm'
1.00
t - - --- 1.40 -
t
t
dtStance
Flo._... t« -
-1
iMlividual
workatedott
--~
5. lighting
Boolcshelve should 6e protected from daylight
Should have separate switches in each area and
individually--.djustable at each work station.
60
1.00
centre ltne
books and equipment)
Administrative offices, work rooms, staff lunch and
lounge rooms
d. Space for Group meetings
At least one multfpurpose meeting room.
e. Mechanical operations and all others
Halls, stairways, toilets elevators and lifts, air ducts,
heating and air conditioning equipment, telephone
and data closets, general storage closets, and
janitors' closets. _ _ _
20% for mechanical operations.
Minimum distances betw-n
tablff
Area
Sensitive materials
Non-work rooms
Stacks
Office and
administration
Reading rooms /
catalogue rooms
llluminance (Lux)
Cess than 50 tux
100-300 lux
150-3001ux
250-500 lux
300-SS0lux
rd
Source: Neufert, Ernst and Peter, Architect's Data. 3 ed. Oxford:
Blackwell Science Ltd, 2000.
Review Module on Architectural Deeign
Chapter 3 : EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
nserves a cotlection of artifacts
jects of scientific, artistic, cultural,
orical i
rtance and ma es them available
· wing thro~gh exhibits that may be
2.
Planning Principle
e
Main Departments:
• Public services
• Educational facilities
e protection against damage, theft,
arid· , damp, and sunlight
works in the "best light"
• Galleries
• Temporary exhibitions support facilities
• General staff services
• Collections management
1.
• Collections storage
Sitt Considerations
a.
• Curatorial
Palltiill!! Urban museum sites generally rely on
...-neaa• patilic parting.
·1e suburban and rural sites.
require off-street parfdng convenient o the main
public entrance.
• Administrative offices
HIGH SECURITY ANO
,,,,.,.-- CLIMAlE COi TROL ZONE
St
E
.ANO
It.
SlAFF
This should be convenient to the staff
entrance, which will be nea shipping and receivin
P:ao~nd'_
GENERAL
£1,HR~E
SlAFF
SERVICES
c.~ :hPPirlll
Service Facilities. To. receive and send
large-crated and unuated museum objects safely and
efficiently, receive construction and other kinds of
materials, and to dispose of trash in a sightly and
efficient manner. Convenient and attractive
accommodation for transformers, emergency
pnerators, chilled water machines and similar pleces
of mechanical equipment
PUBLIC
ENTRANCE
SCHOOL
GROUPS
[tHRANCE
Review Module on Architectural Deeign
•
Chapter 3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
Based on five basic zones according to public exposure and
presence of collections
i. Public/ No collections
ii. Public/ collections
iii. Non-public/ no coUectlons
iv. Non-public/ collections
Collections storage
v.
- - - -richness In favor of anonymous continuity. Better
suited for contemporary art ancl changing exfiibltion
galleries. A middle ground is to provide some level of
physical changeability w ithin the context of fixed
gallery rooms.
•
b. Two of the most important operational eeds will require the
architectural design to be •zonedn to fa'tilitate operation of both:
c.
•
Security for collections
•
HVAGsystem to m aintain nearly constant temperature and
retat ive humidity in all coltections-containing spaces yearround, 24-hours a day.
Gallery Characteristics
i. Discret e Rooms: Galleries should be isolated spaces
conducive to concentrating on the objects exhibited.
ii.
Gallery Flexibility.
•
Provide a variety of well designed, proportioned, and
organized gallery rooms of different sizes and
characters to be able to locate different exhibitions in
different rooms a different times. Used by
ionaf art museum . Better for permanent
.....:==la"
galleries.
•
A more
Gallery Proportions. Generally, a rectangular floor
plarrwittnt'Width of 3.3 to 4.2 meters is appropriate.
Ceilings higher than 4 .8 meters are useful
occasionally, but generally they are difficult to work
w ith and tend to dwarf the objects being exhibited.
•
Gallery Finish Materials. Floors and walls should have
securely attached 3/ 4'" tongue and groove plywood
substrate. Suitable flooring materials are tongue and
groove hardwood strip f looring or carpet. Suitable
wa ll .materials are thtn ( 1/ 4 or 3/ 8"} drywall or
stretched fab ·
all carpet Sdlnetimes is
appropriate eilings can be plain painted drywall or
an acousticalgrid.
Gall~ Support Spaces: Storage space for track
lighting fixtures and bulbs, pedestals, vitrines, cases,
movable exhibition partitions and panels, and other
items should be immediately accessible to the
galleries. If necessary, this space can be provided in a
remote location, bu, arby is much more
convenient.
ist approach t,as been to provide
open floor space, a modular ceiling system, and
movable exhibition walls, so the space can be
reconfigured at will. This solution offers the ultimate
in plan flexibility, b sacffllces spatla variety and
Review Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
INDlVlDUAL GALLERY SIZES AND
CEILING HEIGHTS
FLOOR
ARE.A
CEILING
HEIGHT
GA LL ERV TYPE
(SQ FT)
(FT)
lnttma119 G Menes
O ld Master prints & drawings
300 - 900
9 -11
A rchival d0<:umenC3
J welry
Small decor t 1ve arts
Small arofacts
Min 1ature dioramas
Gems & mioera Is
Insects, smal animals
Medium Galleries
14-19 C . pai ntings
1.000 2,000
-vamong
Publle Services
Set the tone for the entire institution and introduce
the gallery exhibitions.
Use of natural light is acceptable if the 1alleries are
distinctly separate from these spaces.
11 - 14
b. Gallery U&hting consists of a good track lighting system properly
placed in relation t er-the ex-hibitiol w Is.
can
2.000-
smaller galferies
Large Baroque paintings
20th C . paintings & sculpture
Temporary exhibitions
Industrial history
A rchitectural reconstructions
H is IOrical reconstructions
Large dionamas
Large natural history
exhibits (dinosaurs.
whal. ., e1c.)
a.
Lighting levels in the lobby must not be so high that
the galleries seem dark by comparison.
Trad itK>nal sculpture
F urnik.l re
Decorative arts
Sma ll historical exhibits
Mediu m -sized artifacts
Mos t scientific exhibits
Interactive galleries
Most temporary exhibits
c.n....
J.. Museum liahtlnc
5,000
14 - 20
~exposed, shielded, orconcealed.
Une-wltagel120V) track
- provides more flexibility in selection of fixtures
-generally prod
a-softer ffect with less glare.
Low voltage
ures can educe more highly focused
tieams for special effects
- Small low voltage
ures (MR-16) are less
intrusive but more expensive ; the light quality is
harsher
_ _.,,,_-r-ncealect orsfiieldect fjghtlng soarces are desirable.
Windows eenerally are unaestratile
because
galleries
1hn1rrlElieimical degradatlon;v isual
Review Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIO NAL F ACILITIES
d.
c.
Skv'filhtina
: photo-chemical degradation and fading of
muse
objects due to too high light levels, too
uc ultraviolet Oght, mo much heat gain, lack of
light control for special exhibitions where natural
light may be undesirable, inability to eliminate all
light when the galleries are closed, and possible
secur ity exposure.
Should be placed in the center of fixed galleries so
that the light generally comes from behind viewers as
th ey look at the exhibition walls.
overall top lighting in flexible gallery spaces can
result in lighting that is too flat and can produce
glare.
re safer and more easily controlled than
horizontal or pitched skylights and can result in
satisfactory background light levels.
Ughting in Collections Storerooms.
Adequate light for safe handling and examination of
objects while protecting the_m from unneqssary
exposure, especially t ultraviolet light.
Should be switched so that general light is provided
for safe passage in main aisles, and additional light
can be switched on when neededJn partictda reas.
Flu
scent lighting~ most common because jt is
inexpensive, but it must be provided wit
shield,ing,
lly through us f sleeves for Individual
light from high pressure sodium bulbs contains
almost no u raviolet light and is excellent from the
point of view of conservation. Color discrimination is
difficult in this light, however, necessitating separate
examining areas with continuous spectrum lighting.
Portable lighting • o may be used for examination of
objects in place.
UV rays can be avoided almost entirely by using
sources.
tf natural or other light sources are involved, careful
UV filtration is essential. Light reflected from surfaces
covered with white (titanium oiox de) paint contains
much less IN than direct light.
Review Module on Architectural Deeign
Chapter 3 : EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
I.
SPORTS FACILITIES
1. Basketball
t-
2865 collegiate
2560 high school ..
I 90 min
-,.--,---:-:::-:::---:--:-:----=--:-:-:-:--:--:---:----1r----+1430 coleg iale
~- -
90 min
-5L_ 5
~:-~
___. .__
I
''
I
•:
.
I
275 •
....
---
45
I
~
.§
I
I
~
~
End line ·
I
:, -+11
..
'
I
I
300 pral
Unobstructed s17ace
I
I
•:
- ..--L
I
► -
300 pref.
- - - - - --------'I
t
1280 high school
762
-t-
120
I
I
______ JI
Neutral zone
30 wide by 20 depth
0
762
8
-+--
300
90 min
-
200
-..-
\ Edge o: ~..,; 1:~nt
\
200
- - 1300 - - - - - - 1 3 0 0 - - - - - , -
t!SO
425
--r· -r-580
850
t
200
-
- - - 180 - - --
...,.....
1
1400
600
15
Unobstructed space
Edge of pavement
200
1~
300
Amateur Athletic Union (AAU)
Source: Fajardo, Max. Planning and Designers Handbook. z"1 ed.
Quezon City: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
l
Court space
National Collegiate Athletic Association (NCAA)
Review Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
2. Baseball
3. Softball
Turf
--- ~-- ···•::· •.
·:··/ '. "''(l·
c,0
0
FMCe 1imi1 1800 min.
from foul line
;;
I
.,?
~
e llmil 1800 min
beae or foul lne
if
-
......
'-f>'tj
,u.YINO NLD LAYOUT
-
Beckstop
Homeplale
DIAMOND LAYOUT
SIZE NlD oSUZNIION
Beae line • 27.00 meters
Pitching distance ,. 18.30 m.
r .,~11erw plate • 25 eboYe the level of home plate
Dl&tence down foul line • 105.00 m . preferred
Outfield~ to un1e< lleld"' 120.00 m
SOfTBALL
40 CM (11.-.CH) SLOW PITCH
Source: Fajardo, Max. Planning and Designers Handbook.
2"" ed. Quezon City: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
Review Module on Architectural Deeign
Chapter :3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
§
/
I~
4.
Badminton
... ·': ~ ..
150 45
255
45
255
'
I
I
l
75
l
.,l
IUOtlT
LEFT
400
tL
400
-.75
!:,
j
"' 8
l ~------.
NIT
,00
150
POST
Short se,vic:e line
Jl"
IIIGHT
LIFT
Long •MCI ine
!
I
0
I
I
~
. 8ack boundary line
1~
04AMO,CD LAYOUT
30 Cffl (12 In.)
COURT LAYOUT
~TBAU.
,AST AHO SLOW ,.ITCH
BADMINTON
300
LAYOUT 0, MOIIE !'LATE
Source: Fajardo, Max. Planning and Designers
Handbook. zld ed. Quezon City: 5138
Merchandising, 1996.
Review Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 3 : EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
S.
Gotf R
6.
Running Track
- --- ...
'
I
I
- - ---ri
i:
s:
9•
lt I
J I
I
ti
8
g
I
!!
8•
-rr···- ·r·I
I
.u
~
I
I
EDOEOFTHS
l
2S TEES
..
3.ee> ON CENTER
i•i
i.8-' -- - - - - - - - - - ..I
IIANGELAYOUT
'
'---------
TOP~
a.0l"i'. -
380
3110
380
lo
;;
CUIII 7cm.
TU
i
, I
- - - - - _J
MAJIIICIEII
MIi )( SlOI'£ , •
.3: I
360 TUl'F
J..--
100 CUfla .I
"-AIIIOFTWS.
WAUt
SECTION OF Tl&
M 'I
tt"ff
i-------.,.. - -ct-it
- -- .ID
Review Module on Architectural De5lgn
Chapter 3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACIUilES
7.
R
by
8. Soccer
Comerfteg
Comerlla9
Flag
l
!11
Touch line
t
It ..
_ _ _ a.o0 _ LINE '"\. _
..
CENTUt L
1
~
~- a oo .... ....,. :,,1-
I
•;;;
J_~
~ ~
'§i
Penally kic:lc mark
•..
ii
~-
"ii
~
s
C
Restrainingine
~
!•
450
:c:
Touch linw
80
i
2:2.SO -. LINE
•
•
100 00 rrinimum _ 110 00 maximum
Boys 3UOO to 3600
•;
I
!
0
2
§
: J_
I
PLAYING FIELD LAYOUT
5.50
Z2SC
Round ends
5LOOinn.
730
aa..oo .....
--
P\.AYJNG FIELD LAYOUT
FIGURE 5-37 RUGBY
[
seo "'240 ·
I
Posts and crossbarnot to exc.ed 12 cm.
Source: Fajardo, Mox. Planning and Designers Handbook. 2"d ed.
Quezon City. 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
1!50
FLAG DETAIL
J
GOALPOST
&nmclie. lnillle....
GOALPOSTS
For Boys
Review Module on Architectural Design
Chapter :3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
450 450
9. Tennis
CORNER KICK MARK -
1800
1·
I
1
135
135
830
e... line
I
PENALTY../
KICK MARK
-I
c.--"'
It
IMO
Service line
.I
830
-i------
7200 minimum
8000 maximum
-------♦j­
PLAYING FIELD LAYOUT
...
-"'---------720
--------+-
--i½=:=======;:L=n
240
I
SIDELINE
Width and depth of goal posts and
crossbar not to exceed 12 cm.
J ...
90
e3D
I
l
NM
i
J i
I•
I
2340
1-t
8eNlceline
i
90
J
J
"'
l
i.-,eo
,eo ..
1080
&31)
1
I
Fence endolur•
COURT LAYOUT
rGRADE
105
GOALPOSTS
FIGURE 5- oQ TI:NNIS
For Girls
Source: Fajardo, Max. Planning and Designers Handbook.
Quezon City: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
II-
2."d
ed.
Review Module on Architectural Deeign
cdep
Chapter 3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
10. Archery
11. Table Tennis
>
IIC
IL _________ j
Ill
::z:
ADJACENT TAa.ES
0
~
lw
Ill:
::,
~
IL.
-
300
---,I
210
'
!
270
I
~T>1
I
I
!
___ JI
~
-
·- ··-· - ----.
'-
IIIGULATION TAaU
TAM.I HE0HT
7!1 cm .
NET HEIGHT
15 c,n.
ttEAOIIOOM
2 . 10 m. min.
'
L
I
I
300
ADJACENT TA8ll
------2AO
I
---1
I
I
I
_ _ _JI
Source: Fajardo, Max. Planning and Designers
Handbook. 2"d ed. Quezon City: 5138
Merchandising, 1996.
t-----..
•
1IO
I
I
-
NET-
' 20
80
120
· - · -·
80
~
- - ·-
IC
Review Module on Archltectural Design
Chapter 3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
12. Volleyball
13. Billiards
--t-
--300+
11
1•
300
I
'
CHAIRS
I
46 cm.
,min.
I ;ADJACENT 1 :
11 TABLE
1,
11
JL _ -
II
- - JI
0
~
900
5 cm. Spiking line
t
300
I
-
300
~
90
~
....
....
1
<(
cm. s pieing line
900
, .50 """·
I
I
I
WIOTH
1 .65 """·
300
300
+
BILLIARD AND POCKET BILLIARD DIMENSIONS
TYPE OF TABLE
English Snooker
Std. Pool or Bl iard
Std. Pool or Blliard
Std. Pool or Billard
Junior Pool
.Junior Pool
Source: Faj ardo, Max. Planning and
Designers Handbook. 2"" ed. Quezon City:
5138 Merchandising, 1996.
...ii....
BILLARD AND POCKET BILLARDS
300 - -
-300
i...
...<
3:
~
+
ADJACENl
TA8LE
TABLE
:::;
I
...
:,
...z
,oaTAHONIIT
PLAYING TOP
Wcm.
Lem.
T&All'm7f:
180
150
360
200
300
135
120
270
240
210
180
175
160
140
130
110
105
90
Wom. Lem.
--
380
300
290
260
235
200
-
Review Module on Architectural Deeign
Chapter 3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
14. Wrestling and Boxing
15. Bowling
WftESnWG INCAAI
TABLE 1-3 Wll)TH OF BOWLING LANE
(Excluding column, walls and passage between lanes)
Number o Uninterrupted
tnimum idth
Meter
2
a◄s
4
~~
6
10.22
SUf'f'\.EMENTARY MATS
-'( MAT
EB
8
10
12
14
16
18
\
13.61
19.99
20.38
23.76
27.15
30.53
33.92
20
\
For each additional lane. add 338 centimeters
MAT SIZES
Intercollegiate Competiion.... 730 x 730 cm.
International Competi1ion ..... 600 x 600 cm.
Olympic Competition ............ 800 x 800 cm.
317.,._
Dou, .>O>nT"r NC.M
BOXWGIAAU)
'
C0NCWTC WATIII -
,II.
.46 m.
.
3ROPES
60 90 120
FROM FLOOR_
,
-
-~
s i---
'
FLATFOAM MAX HEIGHT 120 A80VE FLOOR
RING SIZES 4 .85 x 4.B5 min.
7.30 x 7. 30 max
w.M.111& 1-6& UCTIOft OP AUTOMATIC 1"111 ll'OTTIIII
--.AAU
Review Module on Architectural Deeign
fl.00II
Chapter 3: EDUCATIONAL & RECREATIONAL FACILITIES
111.00 .....
a.Him.
16.
m.
I
.....
SUIW::C AJSU
STORAGE ANO TOOL AREA
SEIIVICE AISLE
....
--
---------- --~- --~
- - - · .... - -· l'-1
.,,
:II
...i
...
"'...
>
0
0
31
z
g
!j
i
z
0
~
...
i...
...
n
~
0
8a
,..
Q
C
:JJ
~~
...►
8,.. 6z...
>
i:
i?
z
~
,..
,..>
~
►
►
:JJ
~
z
:JJ
"'...
C
J!
"I!
,..
,..~
...
► Cl
:r.
m
(I)
0
tr
I
i
~
I
<
z
z
C)
a... ~~
C
!
...
,.►
~
...
0
.:
~
!
"',._C
!
...0a:
I
!I
.
~
~
I
z
:;:~
>
88
..g
;;;
"'
0
3
0
~
z
'I
I
FOUi.UNi
C
=l
0
z 6z
-
8
4
'<3
~
z
►
g
I
l..lJiES 6.86
~
0
0
~
,.m~
"'
~
8
LANES
.__
>
13.IOm.
--~~i
BOWLER
SlAT£RS
C=::J
C==:l
Sl'ECTATOll'S
;
r-+
-+
I
<-
I
I"'
z
4 - LAHES BOWUNG LANE
Wint
AIIEA
TOILET. IIAR LOCl<fRS,
KITCHEN, MAJIIA0£R'S OfflCE
CHECICING, MlCH. ANO STOIIAGE
'°ULIIIC
'I
Source: Fajardo, Max.
Planning and Designers
Handbook. z"' ed. Quezon
City: 5138 Merchandising,
1996.
6 - LANES BOWLING LANE
I LANES BOWLING PLAN
R.evlew Module on Architectural Deelgn
Cha12ter 4:
ERCANTILE ESTABLISHMENTS
Review Module on Architectural Design
Ch21pter 4 : MER.CANilLE ESTABLISHMENiS
A
•
0EflNITIO
•s for tr ding wh r in
8. 0
1.
•
stations, storage garages and
ere no work is done except
n maintenance requiring pg apeo
g, or the use of highly flammable liquids
- 2)
•
C.
Class B
All stores of less than 2,787 sqm aggregate ar a but over
287 m 2 or utilizing any balcony, mezzanine or floor above
7 elow t he street f oor level for sales purposes except
t hat if more t han 3 f loors are utilized, the store shall be
considm'cr'Ctas
Class C
All stores of 278 m 2 or less gross area used for sales
purpose on the st reet floor only
ZONING CLASSIFICATIONS
•
C-1 (Commercial One or Light Commercial}
A neighborhood or community level of commercial use or
occupancy characterized mainly as a low-rise
building/structure for low intensity com mercial/trade, service
~ usiness activities, e.g. one t o three st orey shopping
centers, small offices or mixed use/occupancy buildings and
the like.
al and retail stores, o ffice buildings, drinking and
-
establtshments having an occupant load of less
.,.:;:-:1!.1.&IQI..M.ii.l.iLl~
, printing plants, police and fire stations,
l::M"~ru· ,oc an workshops usin n
i hly flamma . .Pr
ble materials a nd p.1nt st ~ t t ~H>ulk
sion 3 (E-3)
( - -..i~'6illl.Jb.N~~•~ .0PeA parking gara es where no
repair work is done except exch ange of parts and
main enance requirin no o en fl ame welding or the use~
o
2.
able lici.u_lds
RA 9514
rca · e Occ upancies"
,,
•
C-2 (Commercial Two or Medium Commercial}
A municipal or city level of commercial use or occupancy ,
characterized mainly as a medium-rise building/structure for
mediu m to high intensity commercial/trade, service and ·
business activities , e.g. three to five storey shopping centers,
medium to large office or mixed use/occupancy
buildings/structures and the like
Class A
2
All stores having aggregate gross area of 2,787 m , or
utilizil'l8 more than 3 f oor levels for sa es purposes
Review Module on Architectural Design
cdeD
•
Chapter 4 : MERCAN-TILE ESTABLIS-HMENJS
r ' l ,J.Ll~iHtr~Metfl~Glitan Commen;ial)
ans a m trop~lit an level of commercial use/occupancy,
ch~r~ctenzed mainly as a medium-rise to high-ri
building/structure for h igh to very high intensity
c-ommerci al/trade, service and business activities, e.g, large
to ery large shopping malls, very large office or mixeduse/occu pancy b uildings and the like
•
•
D.
UTS {Utilit ies, Transportation and Services)
A range of occu pancies, characterized mainly as a low-rise or
medium-rise building/structure for low to high intensity
community support functions, e,g.
erminals/ intermodals/multi-modals and depots
SPE (Special)
Other vertical facilit ies not mentioned under regular
uses/ occupancies of buildings/structures such as cemeteries,
m em o rial parks, and the like
DEVELOPMENT CONTROLS
1. Building Height Limit {Table VII 2 of PD 1096)
Meters above highest
No. of Allowable
Type of Building/
grade
Storeys
Structure
10-15 meters
3-5
C-1
18 meters
6
C-2
48-180 meters
16-60
C-3
i
2 Allowable Maximum Total Gross Floor Are.a (Table VILl of PD 1096)
Corne ·- . Co
Type of
Interior/ Inside/ Corner
Throug,
I
Building
C-1
C-2
C-3
lot
Th ougt
Lot
Rear Lot
& End
Lot
Regular
Lot
Lot
Sx80%
Sx75%
12 X
12 X
80%
30 X
80%
5 x 85%
75%
30 x
75%
Sx
85%
5x80%
12 X
80%
30 X
80%
Sx
90%
12 X
85%
12 X
90%
12 X
90%
12 X
95%
30 x
85%
30x
90%
30 X
90%
30x
95%
C-1 w ith
sprinkler
&
firewall
C-2 w ith 12 X
sprinkler 85%
&
firewall
C-3 w ith 30 X
sprinkler 85%
&
firewall
I
5x8O3/:,
12 X
80%
30x
80%
5 x90%
5x90%
12 x
a
ir-g 3
Io
I
ore
st eeu,
rt,e·s, etc.
5 X 9(Y'f,
12 x9mt
90%
30 x
30x
0
90%
5 X 95o/:
Review Module on Archit ectur a l Design
5 X 953';
12 X 95%
30 x 95%
cdep
3. Parking Req uirem ents (From Table Vll .4 of PD 1096)
•
Neighborhood shopping center/Su permarket
•
1 car slot for every 100 m 2 of shopping floor area
Public Markets
1 customer jeepney/shuttle pa rking slot for every 150 m 2 of
wet and dry market floor area
1 vendor jeepney/shuttle parking slot for every 300 m 2 of wet
and dry market floor area
1 off-R ROW terminal t hat can accommodate at least 2
jeepneys and 6 tricy cl es for every 1,000 m 2 of wet and dry
market floo r area
•
Restaurants, fa st-food centers, bars and beerhouses
1 car slo t for every 30 m 2 of customer area
•
Nightclu bs, super clubs, and th eater restaurants
1 car slot for every 20 m 2 of customer area
2 tour ist bus par king slots for each theater-restaurant
•
Units located in office, commercial or mixed-use condominium
buildings/structures
For u nits w ith a gross floor area of 18-40 m 2, provide 1
pooled parl<ing slot for every 2 units
For units w ith a gross floor area of 4 1-70 m 2, provide 1
parking slot for every unit
For units with a gross floor area more than 70 m 2, provide 1
parking slot for every 70 m 2
•
Columbarium
1 car slo t for every compartment niche
Chapter 4: MERCANTILE ESTABLISHMENTS
4 Floor to Lot Area Ratio (Table VII. G. 1 of PD 1096)
FLAR Designation/Rights
Type of
Building/Structure
1.70 up to 3.00
Commercial 1 (C-1)
(at a 5-storey or 15.00 m BHL)
Commercial 2 (C-2)
3.60 up to 9.00
(at a 15-storey or 45 .00 m BHL)
9.00 up to 34.00
Commercial 3 (C-3)
(at a 60-storey or 180.00 m BHL)
S. Angles/Slopes to Satisfy Natural Light and Ventilation
along RROW & Front Yards (Table VII G 3 of PD 1096)
Type of Use
Width of Road
Angle from
or Occupancy
Right of Way
Centerline of
(RROW)
RROW (Degrees)
Commercial
8 meters
71.0
3 (C-3)
10 meters
69.5
12 meters
68.0
14 meters
65.5
16 meters
63 .6
18 meters
61.7
20 meters
60.0
Requirements
Ratio (Slope)
48 m :16.5 m
(2.90}
48 m :17.5 m
(2.74)
48 m:18.5 m
(2.59}
48 m :19.5 m
(2.46}
48 m :20.5 m
(2.34}
48 m :21.5 m
(2.23)
48 m :22.5 m
(2.13)
Review Module on Architectural De6ign
cdeD
Chapter 4 : MERCAN11LE ESTABLISHMENTS
6. Refer ence Table of Maximum Allowable PSO, Maximum Allowable
ISA, the MACA, the Minimum USA and the TOSL by Type of Land Use
Zoning per lot (Table Vlll.1 of PD 1096)
I
Dul Approved
Max.
Max
Minimum
TOSL
I
Zoning
Allowable
Allowable
USA
(ISA
PSO (%)
ISA (paved
(unpaved
+USA)
open spaces)
open spaces)
: C-1 w/ o firewall
70
20
10
30
C-1 w/ firewall
80
10
10
20
C-2 w/ o firewall
75
20
5
25
1 C-2 w/ firewall
85
10
5
15
C-3 w/ o firewall
80
15
5
20
I C-3 w/firewall
90
5
5
10
UTS w / o firewall
40
10
so
UTS w/ firewall
60
30
10
40
I
8. Suggested Minimum Lot Sizes, Dimensions, and Types by Use or
.
Occu p ancy {Table VIII G 7 of PD 1096)
Corner or
Inside or
Use
Interior
ihrough Lot
Regular Lot
or
Rear Lot
C-1
C-2
C-3
Not
allowed
Not
allowed
Not
allowed
204sqm
(12 X 17 m)
301 sqm
(14 X 25 m)
600 sqm
(20 X 30 m)
238 sqm
(14x17m)
365 sqm
(17 X 21.5 m)
813 sqm
(25 X 32.5 m)
End Lot
Not
allowed
Not
allowed
Not
allowed
Corner
through lot/
corner lot
abutting 3 or
more streets
238 sqm
(14 X 17 m)
365 sqm
(17 X 21.5 m)
813 sqm
(25 X 32.5 m)
so
7
Minimum Setbacks (Table Vlll.3 of PD 1096)
Side (meters)
Front (meters)
RROWWidth
Rear (meters)
(meters)
8
6
5
5
5
30 & above
25 to 29
20 t o 24
10 to 19
Below 10
'l
'
5
3
3
2
2
5
3
3
2
2
E.
GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
Parameters
Occupant Load
Store-Retail
(Basement/Ground
Floor)
Store Retail
(Upper Floors)
Maximum Distance to Exits
W/o sprinkler system
With sprinkler system
Minimum Corridor Width
Minimum Stairway Width
PD 1096
RA 9514
2.8
2.8
5.6
5.6
45m
60m
1.1 m
0.75 m for
occupant
load less
than 10
30m
46m
1.12 m
1.12 m for
occupant
load less
than 2,000
Review Module on Architectural Design -
BP 344
1.2 m
Chapter 4 : MERCANi'ILE E5i'ABLl5HMENi'5
Parameters
Minimum Stairway Wid th
Maximum Rise r Height
Minimum Tread Depth
Minimum Ramp Width
PD 1096
0.9 m for
occupant
load of
10-50
1.1 m for
occupant
load more
than SO
0.20m
0.25 m
1.1 m
RA 9514
1.42 m for
occupant
load more
than 2,000
BP 344
-
-
frontages with or without incidental off-street
-
parking.
•
Mall
A large enclosed shopping center with adjacent
parking (or basement and multi-level connected
parking)
An open or covered passageway or concourse
0.18 m
0.28 m
1.12 m
-
providing access to rows of stores
1.2 m
Often contains "anchor" establishments and
recreational facilities like Movie Houses
F. SHOPPING CENTERS & MALLS
•
1.
Neighborhood Center
A shopping center with fewer tlfan 10 stores,
Definitions
•
Shopping Center
•
a planned group of connected retail stores, usually
15,000 square meters of retail space;
with an attached parking area, specially developed on
neighborhood centers are typically open-air
a parcel of private--property and managed by a single
designs.
organization.
It is the village or neighborhood source for staple
and convenience goods and services and is built
around a supermarket or grocery as the principal
retail outlet
Strip
an open-air neighborhood shopping center, smaller
than 1,000 square meters and with at least three
stores, t ypically arranged in a connected row facing a
parking area
•
anchored by a supermarket, and witfi 3,000 to
commercial Strip
miscellaneous collections of Individual stores
standing on their individual lot strung along street
•
Community Center
a shopping center with 10 to 30 stores and
15,000 to 35,000 square meters of retail space,
typically anchored by a discount department,
drug, or home improvement store; they are
commonly open, one-story, with stores arranged
in a single strip, l- or U-shape
Review Module on Architectural Design
...
1·owc1cr Room
cdep
Chapter 4-: MERCANTILE ESTABLISHMENTS
•
Regional Center
a shopping center with 30 t o 100 stores,
anchored by one o r more department stores, and
having 35,ooo t o 80,000 square meters of retail
space
•
No. of
STORES
AREA
REGIONAL
CENTER
30 to 100
35000 to
SUPERREGIONAL
CENTER
at least
100
SHOPPING
CENTER
SPECIAL FEATURES
2
80000m
Super-regional Center
the largest variety of shopping centers, usually an
enclosed mall with more than 100 stores,
2
80000m
plus
Department store
as anchor
With several
department stores
including several department stores, and greater
than 80,000 square meters of retail space
SHOPPING
CENTER
No. of
STORES
AREA
SPECIAL FEATURES
'1000m
2
STRIP
at least 3
COMMERCIAL
STRIP
Not
indicated
Not
indicated
Lined up by the
road; no parking
requirements
MALL
Not
indicated
Not
indicated
Large, enclosed,
with parking; with
anchors
NEIGHBORHOOD CENTER
10 or less
COMMUNllY
10 to 15
CENTER
With parking area
in front
3000 to
2
15000m
15000 to
2
35000m
Supermarket or
grocery as anchor
Drugstore or home
improvement as
anchor
2. Site Planning Principles
As a major planning principle, the concept of orderliness,
unity, and beauty must be applied to every major and
minor aspects of the project. Landscaping, signs,
structures, architectural treatment of spaces between
structures, composition of structures in relation to one
another, colors, and materials - all must adhere to this
vital principle.
•
Foot Traffic
The shopping center is not to be planned to serve
traffic, rather, traffic is to be planned to serve the
shopping center. The best assurance of high sales
volume is the exposure of all individual stores in a
shopping center to the maximum amount of foot
traffic. If shopping centers are to prosper, dense
foot t raffic must be creat ed .
Review Module on Architectural Design
- - - - - - - -- - -- - -- - - - - -
-
-
..---r::-ocAN1"1LE ES1ABLISHMEN1S
Chaapte,. 4 : M i - ~
cdeP
•
•
Ace sc;
Access should be easy and convenient; it should
Pedestrian Areas
Areas include the following:
o
o
be possible to turn-off the highway directly into
the site. Easy access means free-flowing traffic to
Malls, courts, lanes, and plazas
Covered pedestrian areas such as arcades
and covered malls and courts
reach the site.
Entrance Into and out of a shopping center must
be well separated from a major intE:rsection at
•
Automobile Movement Areas
Distribution road system on site
•
Public Transportation Areas
Bus roads, bus terminals, and taxi stands
•
Buffer Areas/Landscaping
Landscape areas separating the parking area or
least 500 meters from the center.
•
St ructures
Provide the following spnces:
o
for retail purposes (retail area)
for service purposes (air-conditioning plants,
electric sub-stations, maintenance shops,
truck roads, loading ducks, and equipment
o
storage)
for other commerci;l uses (offices and
public road system from the shopping areas.
When a shopping center is to be located on a site
close to a residential area, certain buffer should
recreational facilities, community center,
auditoriums, exhibition space and children's
be introduced. For example, a planting strip of 5
play areas)
meters should be used to insulate adjacent
residential uses. This strip is part of the landscape
of the shopping center.
•
Parking Areas
May either be surface parking lot or multilevel
garage
1 car slot for every 100 m 2 of shopping floor area .
Planting and seasonal floral displays in
appropriate places within the center add greatly
to customer appeal. Where wide expanses of
paved parking area occur, it is well to break up
the barren asphalt by well- placed trees in
groups.
Review Module on Architectural Design
cdeP
Ch.apt.er 4: MERCANTILE ESTA6LISHMEN"'T5
3. The Building Pattern
•
The Strip
[
ls a straight line of stores tied together by a
PARKIN.G
canopy over the pedestrian walk extending along
the entrance front to the stores.
]
Excessive walking distances and difficult
merchandising results from excessive length for a
strip center.
•
The "U"
a linear array of stores forming the shape of the
letter U, with anchors placed in the center or on
the two ends, and w ith parking inside the U
the intent of the "U" plan is to reduce the length
.QTRIP
•
The "l"
t wo linear strips of stores connected at right
angles, forming the letter L; anchors are typically
of an otherwise over long strip.
S&ILVICE
H--~;;-.+=~1
I
located on the two ends or at the apex, an Lshape is a common design for community-sized
centers
basically a strip with one end turned, it's
adaptable for site conditions at 2 important
I
AIJUdN'
- - - VE'KICLE
- - - - PEt.>6S Tll ll>N
I
I
I
I
C _~ __ :!J
p s
intersecting roads.
Review Module on Architectural Design
cdep
•
Chapter 4-: MERCANTILE ESTABLISHMENTS
4:H -SHOl'S
14-M.4U.
The Mall
essentially a pedestrian way offering frontage for
t-- l'ARICIN~
two facing strips.
particularly well adapted for enclosure and airconditioning
__ ,.,,1 __
4.
Design Criteria
•
Column Spacing
Significant dimension is that of the length of mall
because it dict ates the storefront widths.
Often used widths are 6.00m, 7.S0m, and 9.00m
with the last being the most flexible because it
can accommodate two stores within the bay.
•
The length of the mall generally should not be
The Cluster
a group of buildings separated by pedestrian
more than 244.00m between department stores
matls or courts and generally grouped around a
and other major features
single key tenant.
most often found in the major shopping center
geared to a single department store.
•
Building Depths
For one-storey shops, buildings are usua lly
36.00m to 42.50m deep, sometimes more to
accommodate b gger stores
If t here are basements or meuanmes, sometimes
the depth can be reduced -by 20 to 25 percent
Review Module on Architectural Design
■-----
cdep
Chapter 4-: MERCANTILE ESTABLISHMENTS
•
Ceiling Heights
relegates non-selling activities to the basement,
reserving the main floor for sales. However, the
tunnel adds to the total construction cost .
Service coorts on the periphery of the building
complex - these are usually partially
shielded/enclosed from the public view by
masonry walls. Their cost is minimal but they
occupy land space that is usually expensive or
could otherwise be used for parking.
over the curb and sidewalk directly from the
street - this is the cheapest and uses a portion of
the street as parking space for service trucks. The
disadvantage of this is that it may cause traffic
congestion
These vary from 3.00m to 4.20m, with 3.60m a
good average. Above the clear height, there must
be adequate space for air-conditioning ducts,
recessed lights, structural systems, etc.
•
Mechanical Systems/ HVAC
Central Plant equipment can be located in a
separate building, on the roof, or elsewhere, so
long as it is economical in terms of design and
length of runs. Individual plants in each store
require exterior space like balcony, window ledge
or roof for condenser units or cooling towers
•
Exterior Walls
Most often in malls, show windows and public
entrances are found inside rather than facing the
parking lot since most customers enter the stores
from the mall . Thus, blank exterior facades are
common.
•
Service Areas
Underground service tunnel under the mall - this
system avoids all unsightly trash, keeps parked
•
Service Elevators
In multi-level projects, the use of strategically
placed freight elevators is necessary. These
usually connect to fireproof passages at the rear
of the stores, and often serve also as fire exits.
With th is type of development that necessitates
service corridors, service courts can be fewer and
more concentrated
trucks out of the way, and avoids allocation of
prime parking space to service trucks. It also
Review Module on Arch itectural Design
cdep
Chapter 4 : MERCANTILE ESTABLISHMENTS
G. PUBLIC MARKETS
1. Definitions
•
•
Location of the parking area should be
between the stores and the streets such that it will
Market - a general term referring to a public place,
building or structure where commodities such as
foodstuffs, wares and other merchandise may be
bought or sold
queu ing of public transport modes such as t ricycles,
Food Terminal - a market where products such as
buses, and jeepney~
be away from the pedestrian areas. A separate a~a
should be provided specifically for park ing and
seafoods, fruits, vegetables and other food
merchandise are being sold on a wholesale basis
•
Satellite Market/Talipapa - a type of market with less
•
than 150 stalls that cater to a limited number of
customers.
•
pu pose m
vb
p ro 1d d Ion penm
r of
SI
3 . Spa
Site Planning
•
The market complex n ds uffa:i n t I nd~.c ping
and buffering A mi mum of 5 m t
fo t
Flea Market - usually an open-air market for sale of
second hand items or antiques. It can be a tiangge or
an open-style market for sale of low-priced goods; or
ukay-ukay where good condition second-hand items
are sold
2.
landsc p;ng
Circulation
Th so ce pro r rrm, , or th
Pedestrian and vehicular circulation for the public
funct, n,
market should be properly pla nned to facilitate
convenience and efficiency. Access, load ing and
unloading of goods, customer and
serv,ces
ou d
:d 1n o
preferably be separated.
•
Parking
m r
cor co
~
•· • o \
II
Powder Room
Chapter 4: MERCANTILE ESTABLISHMENTS
in planning
th e arrangement of the
.
various sections are based primarily on
the segregation of th e wet and semi-wet
.
from the dry sections
•
of the core, and on
demand goods are located at the in ner core
of the market proper, with impulse,
comparative, and convenience goods are
partially surrounding the area. The wet
section should be readily accessible from the
"bagsakan" area, service road, and parking
facilities for de livery vans ana true s.
the strategic location of the so-called
demand
·
.
.
, conv en1ence,
comparison,
and
im pulse goods.
0
o
o
Dema nd goods are basic necessities
which consumers purchase
regardless of cost or distance of
purchase like fish, meat, vegetables
as well as cereals and grains.
Convenience goods are non-basic
commodities purchased and services
patronized as a result of convenie,it
circumstances amid locations for
trade activities. The convenience
items/services are sari-sari/groceries,
carinderia, kitchenware, and foot
wear.
Impulse goods or services are bought
by chance or impulse like barber
shop, beauty parlor, and others.
Taking advantage of consumer purchasing
behavior to make trade activities more
productive, stalls are arranged such that
•
Hawker's Plaza / Flea Market
The hawker's plaza or flea market provides
space essentially allotted for the ambulant
vendors' selling activities. It is developed to
attract and encourage hawkers to avail of its
facilities and passers-by to purchase goods in
the area. This area should occupy 15% of the
built-up area .
ii.
W holesale Area
-
Areas provided for in support of wholesale
activities
•
Bagsakan Area
The bagsakan area must be conveniently
situated at the back of the market core .
Direct access between the bagsakan area and
th e wet sections is required to preclude the
Review Module on Arch itectural Design
Chapter 4: M ERCANTILE ESTABU S HME NT"S
ecess· y of delivering "wet" products
through "dry" areas. The bagsakan area
s ould occupy 10% of the built-up area.
•
Toilets
.
.
h
fd
be
locat
ed
so
as
to
be
easily
Toilets s o u
accessible from afl points of the area t ey
serve. Rest Rooms @ 3.60 sqm / 50 vendors
with the assumption o f 2 vendors I stall.
Ta gen ial Functions
Spaces fo r tangential functions are the administrative
offices, service areas, and special use areas.
•
Pump/ Generator room
A pump/generator may be provided to house
i. Adm inistrative Spaces - situated within the
market core, administrative offices are best
located in an area where they are readily
accessible to vendors and consumers in general.
Administrative Office - assume
l0sqm/personnel.
equipment necessary for power and water
requirements of the market. Pump House minimum of 16sqm.
s.
Rentable and Circulation Spaces
ii. Service areas - supplementary spaces for market
The total area fo r stalls or rentable area is
core function
assumed to be 52-58% of the total built-up area, giving
42-48% for circulation and related spaces.
4. Utility Spaces
•
Main Collection Station for Solid Wastes
The main collection station is the main
holding receptacle for garbage or solid waste
after collection from the vendor's
receptacles. From this main receptacle, the
bulk of solid waste is picked daily for disposal
elsewhere. Garbage Area - assume to be
0.064 sqm. I stall
6. Size of Stalls
i.
Basic Modular Design Grid
The basic modular design grid is 1.20 by 1.20 meters.
ii.
Average Sizes of Stalls
Space must be provided in the stalls for vendors. A
minimum of 1.44 square meters is adequate for this
purpose. The basic recommended average sizes of
stalls shall be as follows:
Review Module on Architectural Design
----
----
......
I;
C h a p ter 4 : M ERCANTILE ES TAB LISH M E NTS
T
meat, dairy prod uce, frozen food, delicatessen, and the
storage coolers necessary for each departm ent . The
remaining 50% is for grocery items. Half of which can be
non-food items such as ho use ware, soft goods, glass
o f Stalls/S ction
Fi h, meat, dried fis h
Fruits. vegetables, ot hers
San-sa ri, groceries
w ar e, health & beauty aids.
•
Delivery and Storage Areas
Deliveries are made at t he preparation and st orage area
located at t he rear of the building making the selling
space more or less square. Refrigerated fixtures should
be placed near their associated work rooms and storage
Dry goods, grains and cereals
and footwear
'
17.28 sqm
f.
Carinderia, general
merchandis ing services
SUPER ,1AR KETS & DEPARTM ENT STORES
1. SYpennarlt ets
S
, arket is a m arket dist inct fro m a wet or dry
a
t e
co
et a d larger -t han a grocery in which shoppers serve
se es by using baskets o r pushcarts in selecting
oditie s fro m she lves or co ld d isplay storage and pay
coolers.
•
Ceiling Height
Floor area of Retail
Space
Up to 400 sqm
Over400 sqm
Above 1,500 sqm
Minimum Ceiling Height
-
3 meters
3.3 meters
3.5 meters
e r purchase at t he exit .
•
Store size
Fr ee-stand ing supermarkets usually have an average area
o about 2,000 to 3,000 square meters. 7S to 80% of this
area rf allocat ed t o st ore area while the remaining 20 to
25% is allotted to service areas such as storage, coolers,
rt!pading are~, grocery storage, etc.
•
•
Aisles and Shelving
Column location should be kept out of the shopping
aisles assuming 2 meter aisles between 1.2 meter
wide shelving islands. Displayed goods shou ld not be
higher than 1.8 meters and lower than 0.3 meter
above floor level.
Area Allocation
About 50% of the supermarkets total equipment and
fixture investment is refrigeration equipment, such as
Review Module on Architectural Design
1.1111111
----cdep
Chapter 4: MERCANTILE ESTABLISHMENTS
--,
I
..,
I
I
i
0
"'
N
.,.. -
l
.!.
_,
- 130 - - - 1
130 -
~
10
Supermarket check-out desk
•
."
I:~-
Floor area of Retail Space
Required Number of Cash Desks
Upto 499 sqm
2-3
3-4
I
500-799 sqm
800-899 sqm
1000-1499 sqm
...,."l.r.,_
~
4-5
6-7
•
-
...,
~ L_
-1
I
II
-
I
"'
I
n
-
~
~
\I
I
\
'I
I,
'.
0
l
120
-~
n
I-
@
-
--
I
.;-_,_.
1
-
8
:.~~~
Cash Desks
Variation on
r
...
Source: Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Data. 3 rd ed.
Oxford: Blackwell Science Ltd, 2000.
®
I
I,
- 140
Variation on
•
@
®
Variation on
Parking
Review Module on Architectural Desi0n
@
l
a
Chapter 4 : MERCAN'"flLE ES•ABLISHMEN'"fS
lot for every 100 square
ct area.
•
Fast casual - slightly more upscale than fast food. Fast
casual restaurants offer disposable dishes and
flatware, but their food tends to be presented as
more upscale, such as gourmet breads and organic
2.
e artment store is a very large shop, generally
r I ors selling a wide variety of goods,
g cl thes, household goods and food.
•
•
•
s•g
he design should provide maximum flexibility to
permi frequent adjustments required for the
sea nal sales patterns
Columnation
A main structural grid between 5.4 m and 6 m are
commonly used.
Parking
Provide 1 car parking slot for every 100 square
meters of retail area.
ingredients.
•
Cafeteria or Canteen - a type of food service location
in which there is little or no waiting staff table
service, whether a restaurant or within an institution
such as a large office building or school.
•
•
Bistro - is a cafe that offers full meals (albeit, cheaper
than a full fledged sit down restaurant)
Food Court - a large hall that house groups of small
outlets selling a wide variety of specialist food
products.
•
Cafe or Coffee Shop - a restaurant that does not offer
table service. Customers order their food from a
count er and serve themselves. A cafe menu
G. RESTAURANTS
1. Definition & Types
traditionally offers things such as coffee, espresso,
Restaurant is an establishment where meals are served to
pastries and sandwiches.
customers.
Bistro - a cafe that offers full meals usually cheaper
•
Fast food - attracts customers for its speed and
than a full-fledged sit down restaurant
convenience. Fast food restaurants are typically
chains which can be independently operated or
franchised
•
Pub or Bar - short for Public House, a pub or bar is an
establishment with a bar that offer alcoholic drink
often also providing light meals
Review Module on Architectural Design
,
---Chapter 4-: MERCANTILE ESTABLISHMENTS
- ~•~
I tvl
in
n - Jlso known as family style
However, the space allocation may also vary
.i '"' , ' CJ uJI style restauran ts offer moderately
p1 K ·d , tre s Casual tyle restaurants offer table
s e rv,ce, non-disposable dishes, while still ·
e p ng the menu moderately priced
•
depending on the type of food-service facility:
Type of Facility
Dining Space per Seat I
(mZ)
Table Service
Counter Service
Booth Service
Cafeteria Service
Fine 01 ,n
f,ne dining is used to describe a much more upscale
restaurant, one that offers diners an elegant
~
Banquet
atmosphere with high quality service. The chefs in
1.11 1.67
1.49 1.86
1.11 1.49
1.11-1.49
0.93-1.11
fine d ining restaurants are usually professionally
trained and the food is fairly expensive
•
~~~
r
Space layout for a dining room is dependent upon the
following variables:
2.
Dining Areas
• s,ze
The total space required for dining area is based on:
The number of persons to be seated at one time
This is determ ined by considering the total
Types of seating to be provided
Table sizes desired
Pattern of table arrangements
Aisle space desired
Number of service stations ne~ded
number of customers to be served for a given
t ime period, and the turnover (number of times a
seat will be occupied on a per-hour or per-meal
basis)
The space allowed per seat
As a rule of thumb, 1.35 square meters or 1S
square feet should be provided per din ing seat.
Review Module on Architectural Design
- -
·----
--
j
cdep
Chapter 4 : MERCANTILE ESTABLISHMENTS
•
Dining Tables
2 70 m
/
/
I
Typical Si zes and Shapes of Dining Tables
Type
Shape
Minimum
Spacious
I
Tables for
l ' sor2' s
I
Tables for
3' s or 4's
Tables for
S' s or 6' s
Size (m)
0.60 x 0.60
(ml
0.75 X 0.75
Rectangle
Round
Square
0.60 X 0.75
0.75
0.75 X 0.75
0.75 X 0.90
0.90
1.05 X 1.05
Rectangle
Round
Rectangle
0.75 X 1.05
0.90
0.75 X 1.50
0.75 X 1.20
1.20
1.05 X 1.80
Round
1.20
1.50
Square
--------
'
0.90m
/
/
==i
]]
---------.
~
D
,
•-)S
=r i'
E
0
....
....
'
Module for a square table
to be arranged in a
rectangular pattern
..
'-/-
2.50 m
/
•
/
Aisles
Minimum Aisle Width (m)
Service Aisle (limited operation)
Service Aisle (with cart service)
Access Aisle
'- Combined Service & Access Aisle
0.75
1.35
0.45
1.10
-
-------
'
Module for a square table
to be arranged in a
diagonal pattern
Review Module on Architectural Design
1111111
cdeD
Chapter 4: MERCAN1ILE ES•ABLISHMEN1S
210
00
170
❖
I
~
❖ ~
so
I
..,
..,w
6
-'
"3:
210
i
30
MODULE
TABLE • 75
CHAIR • ◄5
266
+
SERVICE
'
~~
80
TABl.E ANO CHAIR UNITS
90
136
-t-
IIHIUl~IJ
~
SERVICE
170
-+80
-+
SERVICE
180
105
170
~ ~
180
50
80
25
lo
I
900TH SEATING
MOOVLE
IIO
Source: Fajardo, Max. Planning and Designers Handbook. 2
nd
ed. Quezon City: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
Review Module on Architectural Design
111111-----Chapter 4 : MERCAN1ILE ES1ABLISHMEN1S
cdeP
-
90
I
J1~
,~.r~
IL-l..J-L!
~,
I
l! I
i II
t::
I
~
3:
I
I
I
I
II
~I
~I
3:
I
60
100
IIO
+-
I
Module
236
90
I
I
,w
I
90
'°
·:~
106
I·
I
i
I
I
I
120
II
Wall
~
~
~~-~~
l
136
20
250
I
I
160
Module
20
IIO IIO
nd
Source: Faj ardo, Max. Planning and Designers Handbook. 2
ed. Quezon City: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
Review Module on Architectural Desi9n
Chapter 4 : MERCANTILE E51A6 LISHMEN1S
10 18!:>
60
I
I
0
10
10
3(
i
30
~
splay
7
76
46
106
22
76
\.::
I
-
I
46
20T
75
:·~•i.i~::: I
I
SODA FOUNTAIN STANDING OR SITTING AT COUNTER
ELEVATION
45 to
60
lO
75
I-
I-
"II(
1.1,1
TABLE
<(
w
V>
'1)
J
One person per side = 60 to 75
Two persons per side = 105
Maximum serving and cleaning= 120
30
1~
.
l
20
70
45
60
. .....
.I 22
\:( .. : . · .......
•; ..-:
!:
I
20
_:...._i_
Pt.AN
7
LUNCH COUNTER
Souru: fa)Ordo, Mox. Planning and Designers Handbook.
Z:- ed. Quezon City: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
Source: Fajardo, Max. Planning and Designers Handbook.
nd
2 ed. Quezon City: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
Review Module on Architectural Design
\.
cdep
Chapter 4 : MERCANilLE E5iABLl5HMENi5
.
to 75
35
10
46
r
3.
I
-,-
20
I
5
'
I
46
45
.1.,__
~
16 .
..
1
-+- - 90 -
- -+- -
65 -
-+-
but this ratio can vary depending on the type of the
restaurant.
Source: Fajardo, Max. Planning
nd
and Designers Handbook. 2 ed.
Quezon City: 5138 Merchandising,
1996.
5,() - - - l
Facility
Restaurant
service
Cafeterias
Hospital
Hotels
b.
snac:11-making
device Of
I
~table
I
Size
The kitchen is typically 1/3 the size of the dining area
DINING COUNTER
60-
Kitchen
a.
105
Meal Servery at Cafeteria
Estimated maximum order per hour
800-1300
200 or less
200-400
400-800
0.33-0.46 0.33-0.46 0.28-0.46
0.37-0.65
0.50-0.75
0.42-1. 70
0.37-1.70
0.37-0.46
0.42-1.10
0.28-1.70
0.33-0.37
0.42-1.00
0.28-0.56
0.28-0.33
0.37-0.93
0.28-0.37
Kitchen Area Allocation
Area
Delivery area & waste storage
Cold Storage
Vegetable & Salad Preparation
Cold meals and desserts
Cake shop
Meat Preparation
Cooking Area
Washing Area
Walkways
Staff Rooms and Office
Proportion in%
10
20
2
8
8
2
8
10
17
15
rd
Source: Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Data. 3 ed. Oxford: Blackwell Science Ltd, 2000.
Review Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 4: MERCANTILE ESTABLISHMEN TS
c.
T p .
•
t Lay ut/
,;terns
F n h YSlem - a layout wherein the
d. Factors t o consider in Kitchen Planning
coo~mg area is at right angle to the server
Type of preparation and services requ ired
Amount of the total production made per unit
]
cookino/'rying
The volume or number of meals served
Variety of food listed in the menu
Production a rea
~ l DCOOkrng/frying
ni
DJ
Elaborat eness of preparation and serving
Quantity of individual service as in hospital tray
~
0
::,
0::,
~
"'
II)
~
Seating and service on several floors
Shape of kitchen, location of ventilation, elevator
shafts, support columns, and partitions
Location of entrances and window placement
Eliminate partitions whenever possible
fin ishing area
._____-*---~
A kitchen serving a smaller number requires a
larger area footage per meal than those serving a
servery
bigger number
•
American syste m - a layout w herein the
cooking area is parallel to the server
e.
Production Area
The food preparation area of a kitchen should
consider the following:
cooking/frying
A 0.60 to 0.75 meter wide table is ideal if no
producti~ ~
dishes or food cont ainers rest at the back of the
finis_hin~
table.
L-----
servery
A 0.90 meter wide table is preferable when t he
back of the area for such st orage.
A 1.10 meter w ide table is recommended where
two workers are working opposite each other.
Review Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 4 : M ERCANTILE ESTABLl5HMENT5
m 't r war Jr a I within
nt rrach of n ,weragc person.
r
Efficient w ork centers are those at right angles to
the traffic lanes
OO meter long tables are used if two
ns arc wor ·ing side by side
A good plan layout allocate less tha n 3096 of total
space for equipment and 7096 for work areas,
r Ing t able height Is normally from 0.80 to
S meter.
traffic lanes and space around equipment, easy
operation and cleaning.
ould allow free, easy movement of
essent ial t raffic. The minimum width for a lane
be
een equipment where one person is working
alon is 0 90 m, and 1.05 m where more than one
1s war ing and another worker is to pass each
o t her in t he progress of t he work.
f.
Serving Areas
The space allowance for serving areas should be in
accordance with the specific facility and type of
service.
Wh mobile equipment is used, 1.20 to 1.35 m
aisle 1s ideal.
the variety and volume: Filled space is
For ma,n traffic lane where workers regularly
unattractive, and crowding is also undesirable.
pass each other with mobile equipment, provide
1.8 m passageway.
An estimated width of 4.50 meters allows 1.20
Door opening must accommodate large piece of
and stock pots.
0.60 m counter width, 1.35 m for workers, and
0. 75 m for back bar. The size of the t ray will
dictate the width of the tray side
The main passageway should not pass through
Average length of counters in college residence,
work centers.
halls, and hospital is from 9.75 to 12.60 meters,
Compactness is essential for step saving. The
work center should be in close proximity to main
while those in school lunch rooms average is
around 4.50 to 6.00 meters.
traffic lanes w ith easy access to them.
Counter height must be set at 0.80 to 0.85 m to
Avoid disturbance from outsiders passing
be comfortable for the workers and patrons. For
through t he w ork centers and to conserved
children, 0.70 to 0.75 m height is desirable wit h
space.
narrow counter for the services t o reach over to
assist child.
equipment such as roast ing pan, baking sheets,
Counter length of cafeteria must be regulated by
meter as patron lane space, 0.30 m t ray side,
Review Module on Arch itectural Design
---cdep
Chapt:,er 4: MERCANTILE ESTABLISHMENTS
g.
Walk-in storage is more feasible for an operation
serving 300-400 meals per day. Minimum
Receiving and Storage Areas
Space allocation for serving and storage depends
on specific needs, such as the volume and types
of items received and stored.
dimension of a walk-in storage is 3.00 m x 3.00 m.
This will permit two storage shelves at 0. 75 m
wide with a 0.90 to 1.20 m wide aisle. A 1.1 m
wide aisle is recommended.
A 2.40 meter-deep and 3.60 meter-long dock is
sufficient for receiving items in an average
operation
I,
3000
I,
The space requirement for food storage for 30
days was calculated as approximately one half
the total served. If 1,000 are served, SO m 2 may
( ~]
be used for food storage needs.
h.
Refrigerated Storage
.,,
,._
0
SHELVING
.,,g
WALK-IN
STORAGE
~
0
0
..,0
The space required for refrigerated and low
temperature food is governed by the following
requirements:
SHELVING
.,,
,._
0
'
The quantity to be stored at one time
Doors shall have a minimum width of 1.05 m to
admit large crate containers
Allocation of storage according to the type of
food:
Storage for
Meat
:;;,
~
-
Fruits & vegetables
____,.--,
Dairy Products
Frozen Food
Salads, Sandwiches, & Baking
Products
Area Allocation in %
20-30
-
30-35
20-25
10-25
5-10
~
J
-
I
i.
Cashier
The most ideal location for the cashier desk or
counter is on the right side of the door when leaving.
This will avoid cross traffic with the incomin
6
persons.
"'!.'
Review Module on Architectural Design
cdeP
4.
,. M"""'CANTILE ESTAe>LISHMENTS
Chaipter ....-:
i;.r-.
Toilets
Fixture per person as prescribed in t he National Plumbing
Code of the Philippines:
1
Water Closet
Female
Male
1: 1-15
1: 1-50
3: 16-35
2: 51-150
4: 36-55
3: 150-300
Over 300, add 1 fixture
for each additional 200
persons
S.
Urinals
1: 1-150
Over 150,
add 1
fixture for
each
additional
150 males
Lavatories
Male
Female
1: 1-150
1: 1-150
2: 151-200
2: 151-200
3: 201-400
3: 201-400
Over 400, add 1 fixture for
each additional 400 persons
Parking Requirement
•
Provide 1 car slot for every 30 m 2 of customer area
Review Module on Architectural Design
Cha12ter 5:
BUSINESS FACILITIES
Review Module on Arch itectural Design
Chapter 5: BUSINESS FACILlilES
A. DEFINITION
•
Business facilities are spaces where services are
rendered. The most common example of a business facility is an
office wherein clerical or professional activities are conducted.
A.
CLASSIFICATIONS
1.
2.
PD 1096
"Group E - Business and Mercantile" '
•
Division 1 (E-1)
Gasoline filling and service stations, storage.garages and
boat storage structures where no worly~ d_one except
exchange of parts and maintenance requiring no open
flame, welding, or the use of highly fl_a/nmable liquids
•
Division 2 (E-2)
Wholesale and retail stores, office buildings, drinking and
dining establishments having an occupant load of less
than 100 persons, printing plants, police and fire stations,
factories and workshops using not highly flammable or
combustible materials and paint stores without bulk
handling
•
Division 3 (E-3)
Aircraft hangars and open parking garages where no
repair work is done except exchange of parts and
maintenance requiring no open flame, welding or the use
of highly flammable liquids
RA9514
"Occupancy belongs to Classification 7: BUSINESS"
•
Business buildings are those used for the transaction of
business other than that covered under Mercantile, for
the keeping of accounts and records and similar
purposes.
•
Included In this occupancy group are : offices for lawyers;
doctors; dentists and other professionals; general offices;
City/Municipal halls; internet shops; massage parlors,
beauty parlors, barbershops of less than SO occupants
and court houses;
Minor office occupancy incidental to operations in other
occupancy shall be considered as a part of the dominant
occupancy and shall be subject to the provisions of the
Chapter applying to the dominant occupancy.
C. ZONING CLASSIFICATIONS ·
•
C-1 (Commercial One or Light Commercial)
A neighborhood or community level of-commercial use or
occupancy characterized mainly as a low-rise
building/structure for low intensity commercial/trade, service
and business activities, e.g. one to three storey shopping
centers, small offices or mixed use/occupancy buildings and
the like.
•
C-2 (Commercial Two or Medium Commercial)
A municipal or city level of commercial use or occupancy,
characterized mainly as a medium-rise building/structure for
medium to high intensity commercial/trade, service and
business activities, e.g. three to five storey shopping centers,
medium to large office or mixed use/occupancy
buildings/structures and the like
•
C-3 (Commercial Three or Metropolitan Commercial)
Means a metropolitan level of commerdal use/occupancy,
characterized mainly as a medium-rise to high-rise
building/structure for high to very high intensity
Review Module on Architectural Deelgn
Chapter 5: BU51NE55 FACILITIES
commercial/trade, rvice and business activities, e.g. large
o v ry large shopping malls, very large office or mixeduse/occupancy buildings and the like
D. 0£VELOPMENT CONTROLS
1
AJlowable Maximum Total Gross Floor Area (Table VII 1 of
f ype of Interior Inside/ Corner Through CornerBuild, g lot &
Regular lot
lot
Through
End lot
lot
lot
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-1 w· h
sprin ler
&
firewall
C-2 with
sprinkler
PD 1096)
12x80%
30x80'J(,
Sx85%
5 X 75%
12x75%
30x75%
Sx85%
Sx80%
12x80%
30x80%
Sx90%
Sx80%
12x80%
30x80%
Sx90%
Sx90%
12x90%
30x90%
Sx95%
Corner Lot
abutting 3
or more
streets,
rivers, etc.
Sx90%
12x90%
30x90%
Sx95%
12x85%
12x85%
12x90%
12x90%
12x95%
12x95%
30x85%
30x85%
30x90%
30x90%
30x95%
30x95%
Sx80%
&
firewall
C-3 with
sprinkler
&
firewall
I ht l.,mIt (Table VII 2 of PD 1096)
Bui·1d·mg Heg
Meters above highest
No. of Allowable
Type of Building/
grade
Storeys
Structure
10-15 meters
3-5
C-1
18
meters
6
C-2
48-180 meters
16-60
C-3
2.
3. Parking Requirements (From Table Vll.4 of PD 1096)
•
Units located in office, commercial, or mixed-use buildings
regardless of number of storeys
Units with a gross floor area from 18 to 40 sqm, provide 1
pooled parking slot for every 2 units
Units with a gross floor area from 41 to 70 sqm , provide 1
parking slot for each unit
Units with a gross floor area of more than 70 sqm, provide 1
parking slot for every 70 sqm and for a fraction therof
4. Floor to Lot Area Ratio (Table VII G 1 of PD 1096)
HAR Designation/Rights
Type of
Building/Structure
1.70 up to 3.00
Commercial 1 (C-1)
(at a 5-storey or 15.00 m BHl)
Commercial 2 (C-2)
3.60 up to 9.00
(at a 15-storey or 45 .00 m BHL)
Commercial 3 (C-3)
9.00 up to 34.00
(at a GO-storey or 180.00 m BHL)
Review M odule on Architectural Deeign
Chapter 5 : BUSINESS FACILITIES
s. .A~/Sk>pes to S.tisfy PQtural U1ht and Ventilation Requirements
RROW & Front Yards able VII.G.3 of PD 1096)
T ~ of Use
or Occupd cy
W
d
Angle from
Centerline of
RROW (De rees)
71.0
10
eters
69.5
12 meters
68.0
14 meters
65.5
16 meters
63.6
18 meters
61.7
20 meters
60.0
85
20
10
80
15
75
5
5
5
Max.
Allowable
PSO (%)
C-3 w/firewall
UTS w/o firewall
UTS w/ firewall
90
Ratio (Slope)
48 m:16.5 m
(2.90)
48 m:17.5 m
(2.74)
48 m:18.5 m
(2.59)
48 m:19.5 m
(2.46)
48 m:20.5 m
(2.34)
48 m:21.5 m
(2.23)
48 m:22.5 m
(2.13)
6. Reference Table of Maximum Allowable PSO, Maximum Allowable
ISA, the MA.CA, tne Minimum USA and the TOSL by Type of land Use
Zoning per Lot (Table VIII.I of PO 1096)
TOSL
Minimum
Duly Approved
Max.
Max
(ISA
USA
Zoning
Allowable Allowable
+USA)
(unpaved
PSO (%)
ISA (paved
open spaces) open spaces)
30
10
20
C-1 w/ o firewall
70
20
10
10
C-1 w/ firewall
80
C-2 w/ o firewall
C-2 w/ firewall
C-3 w/o firewall
Duly Approved
Zoning
25
15
20
so
60
Max
Allowable
ISA (paved
open spaces)
5
40
30
Minimum
USA
(unpaved
open spaces)
5
10
10
Minimum Setbacks (Table VIII 3 of PO 1096)
Side (meters)
Front (meters)
RROWWidth
(meters)
30 & above
8
5
25 to 29
6
3
20 to 24
5
3
10 to 19
5
2
Below 10
5
2
TOSL
(ISA
+USA)
10
so
40
7
Rear (meters)
5
3
3
2
2
8. Suggested Minimum Lot Sizes, Dimensions, and Types by Use or
Occupancy (Table VIII.G.7 of PD 1096)
Use
Interior
Inside or
Corner or
End Lot
Corner
or
Regular Lot
Through Lot
through lot/
Rear Lot
corner lot
C-1
C-2
C-3
Not
allowed
Not
allowed
Not
allowed
204sqm
(12x17m)
301 sqm
(14 X 25 m)
600 sqm
(20 X 30 m)
238 sqm
(14x17m)
365 sqm
(17 X 21.5 m)
813 sqm
(25 X 32.5 m)
Not
allowed
Not
allowed
Not
allowed
Review Module on Architectural Design
abutting 3
or more
streets
238 sqm
(14 X 17 m)
365 sqm
(17 X 21.5 m)
813sqm
(25 X 32.5 m)
Chapter 5: 6UGINEGG FACILITIEG
E. GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1. Oc:tupant load
Occupancy
Occupant Load
(PD 1096)
Business/offices
9.3
2. Maximum Distance to Exits
PD 1096
45 meters
[-WJo sprinlcter system
60 meters
With sprinkler system
3.
4.
S.
(RA 9514)
,
9.3
RA 9514
46 meters
61 meters
Minimum stairway width
PD 1096
O.75 m for occupant load less than 10
0.9 m for occupant load of 50 or less
1.1 m for occupant load more than 50
RA 9514
1.12 m for occupant less than 2,000
1.42 m for occupant more than/equal to
2,000
Maximum Riser Height
•
PD 1096 - 200 mm
• RA 9514 - 180 mm
Minimum Tread Depth
•
PD 1096 - 250 mm
• RA 9514 - 280 mm
7.
Minimum ramp width
•
PD 1096-1.1 meters
• RA 9514- 1.12 meters
•
BP 344- 1.2 meters
Occupant Load
Minimum Corridor Width
PD 1096 - 1.1 meters
• RA 9514 - 1.12 meters
•
BP 344 - 1.2 meters
•
6.
-
· ~
8. Fire Sprinkler System (RA 9514)
• All business occupancy buildings 15 meters or more
in height shall be provided with a sprinkler system
F. PRIVATE OFFICES
3.
Definitions
•
Office
Premises used primarily for the conduct
of business relating to administration,
clerical services, consulting, and other client services
not related to retail sales.
•
Office building
Structure designed pri"!'larily as places for work,
commerce or research characterized w ith the
following attributes:
o regularizecl, repetit ive floor plat e
o open and flexible floor plan
o segmented and systematized exterior wall
Review Module on Architectural Deaign
Chapeer 5: BUSINESS FACILITIES
' a c re c ntaining elevators, building mechanical
•
tems and other common elements.
Site constraints - easements, height limits, density limits,
road access, curb cuts, wetlands, floodplains, and any other
4. ot'fa Buffdln& Types
•
elements that reduce or modify buildable area.
R e Office
One to three-level structure
Suited for large, flat sites and low development
densities
•
Density- will determine overall square meters allowed
•
Site Organization- for typical suburban location
large floor plates and roof areas make them well-
a. Surface parking - one-half of the site
b. Building footprint • one-fourth of the site
c. Landscape - one-fourth of the site
suited for skylights, rainwater capture and other
sustainable concepts.
•
Four to 12-level structure
Circulation - 3 considerations: site entry and building dropoff, parking ingress and egress, '9nd service access.
Found in urban and suburban location
Adaptable to varied site configurations and sizes.
}
•
Service - access is typically located under, within, or
immediately adjacent to the building. Typically requires 5000
Typically served by structured parking.
square feet or 464.5 square meters but will vary depending
•
on specific uses and building size.
High-Rise Office
- irtu~a..n
, to SO or more levels.
Found primarily in dense urban conditions
•
Planted Areas and Open Space - Two primary functions: to
Rarely exclusive for office uses due to economic
increase aesthetic appeal of the development and to provide
constraints.
areas for storm water management. Planted are.as can also
screen building from adjacent uses, and provide recreational
benefits to the building occupants.
S. Site Planning Considerations
Zonini- cweraU site development: densl
, heights and
setback
Review Module on Architectural Design - - ·
·----Chapter 5 : 6USJNESS FACILITIES
"'
[ID
Extenor Core
Cenlral Core
~Core
CO"MMOH Of 'LOOttrl.ATI AALU
Plaming end Urt>en Design Slandaros By American Plamlng AsSOClllllon,
Fredenclc R Sleiner, Kent Butler
r
I50'-200' Typ1nl
S11octw1I S.tbuk
leue Sp;an
...,
~
~
Core
~
,z
floorplue
~
Ext~•or
PlarWW1g and Urban Des,gn Standards By American Planning Associahon,
Fredend( R. Steaner, Kent Buller
Structural &y
DIAGRAM OF BASIC OFFICE
COMPONENTS
6. BuUding Planning Considerations
a. Core - contains most mechanical, electrical, elevator and
Plannong end Urben 0es,gn Slllndards By Amencan Plennong AsSOClebon,
Fl'8deocl( R S I -. Kenc 8uOer
service function
•
Core Location
•
Central (interior)
Mosrcommon. Core is near the center of the floor
plate.
Advantages:
Review Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 5: 6USINESS FACILl"rtES
Allow
II window space to be utilized as rental
Disadvantages
Problems of access to the far sides and corners of
0
offi
P e & will permit offices of varying
d pths to receive natural light.
'-
Convenience of access
the building
Long access corridor is required if there will be
o
multi-tenant occupancy on any given floor.
Simplifies area division and provides good
o
fie ibility of tenant distribution in the same way.
Horizontal utility runs may also be relatively
equidistant from the core
o
•
Permits a floor plan free of columns, thus a
totally flexible office layout.
o
Split (interior)/Multiple
Several cores at logical intervals across the floorplate.
Advantages:
o Eliminates need for peripheral corridor on the
Disadvantages
o
May also lessen flexibility of tenant distribution.·
Affects flexibility of office layout by limiting depth
core as access to this core is from area between
of offices in the mid-zone of each floor.
its split elements.
Consumes floor area as it requires access corridor
o
More flexibility of floor-area division
around its perimeter.
•
•
Off-center (interior)/ Side
Also called Hperimeter". Core is at the edge of the
Exterior
Advantages:
o
floor plate.
Advantages
Permits all windows/ building perimeter space to
0
0
0
be used for offices
More flexibility in maximum depth and
arrangement of spaces when large open spaces
are required.
Opportunity to develop small secluded space in
relatively narrow portion of floor plate closest to
o
Leaves the entire floor area of the building
available for tenant use
Does not complicate the floor plate either
functionally or structurally
Disadvantages
o
Requires long access corridor in case of multitenant occupancy.
o
Occupies desirable window space such that
offices immediately adjacent to the core may not
receive any natural light.
the exterior walls.
Review Module on Architectural Design . . . . . .
c~
Chapter 5 : BUSINESS FACILl,IES
- exterior wain
b.
•
Building form is influenced by: population density, lease
span (distance from the edge of the core to the exterior
IUdtO I OOII
l ~
,._~()t.TA
wall), daylight requirements, and cost of land.
•
!o
••
Building shape and size is influenced by commercial
forces, architectural design and zoning constraints.
c
b
•
Floor ptate - determines leasable area.
•
'
Layout as many of the building elements as possible on
Typical Planning modules: 1.2 meters and 1.5 meters
•
Elevators:
- .. ,
O'
;..
t ne elevator per 50,000 square feet of
building area
•
§
:0 :: '
the planning grid (columns and exterior wall mullions).
•
-$
Floor to floor height:
4.00 t04.20 m
For buildings with shorter structural span: 3.75 m
lntended Finish ceiling height: 2.60 or 2.75 m
Oepth of raised floor if used: 150mm
Ceiling system (usually integrated with the lighting
system • atieast 150mm
Sprinkler system: 70mm (can be threaded between
the ceilings lights
Building Type Basics for Office Buildings
By A. Eugene Kohn, Paul Katz
7. Office Planning
a.
Basic Office Functions
Review Module on Architectural Deeign
~
•
i
Chapter 5 : BUSINESS FACILITIES
i.
ii.
Management - isolated from general office traffic
and casual interruption
Finance•
•
Accounting department - near sales
department
Purchasing department- Dear entrance or
reception room s1nce it has a lot of contacts
with vendors.
•
Personnel Department - close to reception
are so that they can interview applicants
without disruption of the-pnerar office area
Data Processing should be out of usual office
traffic and where noise can be confined.
iii. sates -provisions for catalogues and specification
files. Needs conference rooms or an all-purpose
room for trainings, meetings, conference and
aemonstrations
iv. General Services -central files, library, mail
handling, duplicating and general communications.
Normally in the center of all other functions in
the office.
Mail handling is at either end of the office work
•
flow.
.
Duplicating services are separated due to noise
•
v·.
and fumes.
. ..
:rechnical-services - located near the act1v1t1es they
assist (i.e. production, sales, etc.)
Production - usually in a second office.
b.
Planning Standards
i. Distance of workstations:
• 1.80m from front of desk to the desk behind it.
2.10m when desks are in rows of two
ii.
Space requirement per workstation: 8.00 square
meters
iii. Open Space work area
• supervisor adjacent'to receptionist or secretary
• desks with employees having more visitor contact:
near office entrance
• desks of employees doing classified works: far fn>m
entrance
iv. Room sizes
•
Reception room : 35 sqm
Waiting room: 18 sq. m
•
Conference room: 45 sqm
•
Top Management offices: 3.60 meters by 4.50
meters long
•
Top executive: 40-50 sqm
•
Junior executive: 10-20 sqm
•
Supervisors: 8-10 sqm
v. Workstations
•
In large general offices: 1.50 x 1.80 meters each
Review Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 5 : BUSINESS FACILITIES
I
I
I
~
70 .....
•
I
". L . . -
52 42
....
Swivel chair
Swivel chair on caeters
'►
Pivoting chair
►
....
........
70
~
),.
Individual tables
75
'►
Individual ~ with filing
racks to rear
U-shapeddeak
5ouJU: ~ert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Data. red. Oxford: 8/ockwell Science Ltd, 2000.
R.eview Module on Architectural Design
-;:.-;.J
; ~·} ;
11111---C hapter 5 : BUSINESS FACILITIES
.... ., ..........
dt
. ,,, . . . . . . _
Rowa of ubln in btoc:b
with ......red . . .
flows of taMea wftft flJing
,1,,.
recka to,..,
Filing c.blneta with
peaugeway
Pis,eon-holea
llloc:ka with in-Hae Mating
.......
Standard writl119 desk with
Souru. ~ufrrt, Ernst and f>et~r. Architect's Doto. ~ ed. Oxford: Blackwell Science Ltd, 2000.
Review Module on Architectural Design
..---Chapter 5 : BUSINESS FACILrTlES
G. BUSINESS PROCESSING OUTSOURCE OFFICES
Definitions
1.
•
Call Centet
A centralized office used for the purpose of receiving or
transmitting large volume of requests by telephone
Operated through extensive open workspace for agents,
T...._
with workstations that include a computer for each
COIIL-Ucted
direct1y to
win t111• ..._
agent, a telephone set/headset connected to a telecom
Circulation betw. .n tables
and windows
switch, and one or more supervisor stations.
It can be independently operated or networked with
--...... ,o
additional centres, often linked to a corporate computer
J":
network, including mainframes and local area networks
76
l
•
Contact Center
Also known as customer interaction center.
A facility used by companies to manage all client contact
through a variety of mediums such as telephone, fax,
letter, e-mail and increasingly, online live chat.
•
Filing c.w..ta beneath
wi.""ldow . . .
Office desk; 0 .5 m2 le■■
ft_,
■pace
Source: Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Doto. 3'ded.
Contact Center Design
Effe~ive layout of floor plans, ergonomic furniture
solutions
. of space that y ields
. . and
. effect'ive ut1.1•tzat,on
fewer tnJunes, and greater individual and team
productivity.
Oxford: Blackwell Science Ltd, 2000.
Review Moc:lul e on Architectural Design
•
FACILITIES
Chapter 5 .• et.USINESS
L-'
2.
OesJcn Con.slderatfons
Call Centers an! high density, high stress and high technology
~
nments with call center employees sitting for long periods,
entering data for hours, staring at the screen for long periods all
the while in a noisy environment.
•
Worlcflow of the contact center floor
Consider the layout and flow of agent workstations,
supervisor, management and scheduler offices and
meeting rooms
Other space requirements: restrooms, break rooms,
common area.
Location of columns, corners and utility access panels
Workstations should foster teamwork and open
RECOMMENDED DIMENSIONS FOR SEATED WORKSTATIONS
Height of
worksurface
(height to
top of work
surface)
lffixed:
680 t o 720mm above floor
level
580 to 730mm above floor
level
If adjusted:
Widt h
Area of
work
surface
Depth
-
1500mm minumum
900mm minimum
Bench Thickness
25mm maximum
Width
800mm m in imum
communication such as open design elements that offer
lower panel heights, step-down or acrylic panels and dogbone style workstations.
•
Size of workstations
Workstations should be large enough to accommodate
the workflow necessary for agents.
Volume of
leg space
Viewing
distance to
work
Depth
550mm m inimum
Height
580mm maximum
Minimum
350mm
]
Maximum
750mm
Standard workstation size is 4-foot wide but many
contact centers these days are using variations of 5- and
6-foot wide designs
Seat pan
height
Surface of seat to
floor
Seat depth
footrest area
380 to 510mm
330to 430m m
300x 375mm
Review Module on Architectural Design
--------------
J
...
14
Chapter 5 : BUSINESS FACILITIES
•
•
dr
s wor station issues such as
center and its worker i.e. panel height based on
adiustment, keyboard and
ce ent, desktop layout, posture,
e • 1ghtmg, screen glare and reflection ,
Ir
r
Furniture
Provide furniture that can best meet needs of the call
balance between supervision, noise control and
privacy needs.
use, e board equipment and radiation,
g technique. speed and posture during keying,
•
ngth of t ime on keyboard.
mic accessories can reduce repetitive motion
Wirings and cable management
Wirings and cables should be totally concealed yet
easily accessible in the furniture.
Provide furniture systems that also allow connections
Junes and costs associated with absenteeism and
produ
ty.
between workstations.
avy-duty chairs with mult iple adjustments,
System furniture with 8-wire lectrical system
ad1ustable keyboard trays, adjustable monitor arms,
reduces "spaghetti effect" and safety hazards
wrists rests and even footrests.
associated with exposed wiring. It also allows
Wo
electrically powered items to be plugged directly into
Surface height : Height of work surface and/or
the workstation as opposed to traditional furniture
a
the chair such that the work surface is approximately
nger length below the height of the elbow when
systems where devices are plugged into the base at
seated.
floor level.
Chair : Seat t ilt such that the position is comfortable
when using the keyboard, usually, close to horizontal
•
User-friendliness of facility
Maximize training space by using flip-top tables that
but tilted slightly forwards. Use footrest if this
position places an uncomfortable strain on the leg
can be rolled away when not needed and
muscles or if feet do not reach the floor. Backrest
reconfigured for alternative uses.
Use aesthetically pleasing colors for furniture fabric,
should support the lower back when sitting upright.
paint, wall paper, graphic designs
Proper lighting
Space efficient traffic patterns.
•
Utilization of "one-stop shopping manufacturers".
Review Module on Architectural Design
-- -----
- ---
Chapter 5: BUSINESS FACILITIES
Loo for full-s rvlce manufacturers that provide not
only agent furniture systems but also storage
(For stand-alone bank branches)Near or at
ground level to allow for easy or public access
cabinets, meet ing tables, chairs, and administrative
and executive office furniture.
ATM is rear loading and cash loading and
Makes it easy to find replacement or additional parts
retrieval is done by bank officers).
and makes new purchasing easier when expansion is
required.
Should be accessible to customers even during
Allow access from the rear to the bank staff (if
off-banking hours.
Necessary ventilation for the ATMs should be
MNIS
H.
L
provided so as to avoid significantly reducing the
Oefinttion
burglar resistance of the machines.
A financial inst itution that accepts deposits and channels
those deposits into lending activities, either by loaning or
capital markets. (en.w ikipedia.org)
An institution which allows money, whether in cash or in
some other form, to be paid in and withdrawn.
(Architects' Data by Ernst and Peter Neufert, 3 rd Edition)
Should be protected by a burglar alarm system.
bank staff
side e ntrance
service room. toilets, etc.
bookkeeping and accounts
2. Planning Consideration
a.
Public Spaces
bank
records vault
Lobby
Contains the reception/information, loan officers,
tellers and check writing desks and has various
cash counters: securities, foreign
exchange, cheques, g iro
customer s'
safety deposit
boxes
manager
auditing
department
group
meeting
room
credi t
department
banking hall
positions for conducting transactions.
Often fitted with chairs or bench seats for waiting
guard
o r on o ther floors
customers.
entrance
•
ATM/Cards Payment Machine Area
Relationships of rooms in large banks
Should be located in a well-lighted area
Review Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 5: BUSINESS FACILITIES
•
TeUers
Should be located at one side of the bank ta
permit future expansion
Spaces around the teller should allow easy
circulation of the public
Usually protected with bulletproof reinforced
glass to prevent criminals from jumping over the
counter.
Should be provided with electric alarm system
operated by foot or knee to guard against
potential attacks.
Money is held securely in st1ffiaard steel cabinets
German Type Teller Set-up
Swedish Type Teller Set-up
usually underneath the counter.
•
Loan Officer
•
Check/Form writ ing desks
Location should not block circulation of the line
TYPICAL SIZES SMALL MONEY CABINETS
up space in front of the teller
•
Officers Platform
Open space for contact officers, cubicles for
collection officers, installment loan and
•
commercial loan offices
Access to the safety deposit vault (for Customers)
and money vault (for Tellers)
Access from the main banking hall should be
partitioned off.
EXTERNAL DIMENSION
Height Width Depth
60
so
so
80
60
100
120
60
so
60
45
45
45
45
45
INTERNAL DIMENSION
Height
35
45
65
85
105
Width
Depth
35
35
45
45
45
33
33
33
33
33
Source: Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Data. 3'ded.
Oxford: Blackwell Science ltd, 2000.
Review Module on Architectural Design
Number of
shelves
1
1
2
2
2
Chapter 5 : BUSINESS FACILrflES
-
A
FIXED GLASS <LEXON>
-----=
WOOD STOP PWG ON BOTH SDES
wrn-i•BLJL LE.TCATCl-£5 TOP AND
bU I I UM /\NU I WU ' / e. LJIA. f- lNGl:cH H<JtJ::B
· A.
I
\
1-'L/\S l'JC LI\MN/\ I t::
A LLSURFACES _ _ _ __,-
,l
(')
'
MO VARI .F.GI .ASS
W ITH'BULI.ET" C/\TCH _µ~~~
/
~
!NGROOVESATSIDES
--
- ----
STAl'JIF_<;S
STEEL
DEAL TRAY -
><_
__.....
></
·--....
/ ,"STEELPLATE
1
1
-/
-:•
'
n• ' . .
~1--
TELLER'S CABl'IET
f'O~ffJON 13C:VOND -
/'
---
ij
r
/
'
,,-\ WASTE
\
EASKET
\
\
\
-...::
--- ---..._
-.::-----::-----
--..._..._-----:::--...
----
..._
MOVARI F
GLA SS BELOW - -
--
-... --....
I
~
1;
1 ;,·
WOODPR!VACYPANELPLASTIC ~
LAMNATE ALL SIDES (SLOES
_,,
DOWN INTO SLOT. 60TH SIDESl - _,, /
1-lXl::LJGL/\SS
/
- - - - + - ~ l r - 11;
,,
1·1,-
/
-,- ,,-r·-
- -L - - - - - l
Wl'IG PAN EL - //
FIXED G L ASS _..?,:::./ SECT ION A
Copyright © 2000
Architectural GRAPHIC Standards CD-ROM
John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New York, NY
~view Module on Architectural Design
---Chapter 5: BUSINESS FACILITIES
b
Operations
. The op r t i~ns department supervises and control all
clerical works which run the bank and ke th
.
.
.
ep e records in order
It rs located off the marn banking hall.
·
•
Bookkeeping department
•
Proof and Transit Department
- Functions are:
o
to establish whether deposit totals balance with
totals shown on deposit tickets
Prove tot als of general ledger entries and other
transactions.
o
o
o
o
o
Collect fata for computing the individual customer
service charges and determining the availability of
customers' funds
Accomplish the assigned functions at lowest possible
cost.
Forward items for collections so that funds are
available as soon as possible
Distribute all incoming checks and balance to their
destinations
Should not-be accessil>le to the public. Can be separated
from other departments but must be in proximity to the
•
•
data processing area.
Data processing area
_
where computers are instal.led
•
Vault
In smaller banks, the vault may be divided into two: one
part for bank use, the other for customers. Larger banks
normally has separate vault for bank use from that of the
customer use.
o
o
Records Vault
Serves the Proof, Trust and Bookkeeping
Department. Must be fireproof.
Valuable and confidential papers are securely
stored by use of steel document cabinets.
Floor safes are used for secure storage of petty
cash and documents.
Safety deposit vault/boxes
Provides rentable boxes for the storage and
safekeeping of customers' valuables that are
rarely used.
Walls, floors and ceilings must be of reinforced
concrete 300mm thick.
Doors are made from toughened steel plates with
fireproof and non-melting reinforcements,
usually 27-30cm thick. hese are protected by
electrically operated alarm systems that are
triggered by the slightest vibration of the door
Clerical/Mail and other minor services
- Should be in close proximity to the proo ana
transit department.
Review Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 5 : BUSINESS FACILITIES
s avings b ank
str ongbo xes
1'
6 , 20 • 36
r
f
195
st rongboxes
1 90
-2 00
2.02
-=-~1-,2 · 30 · 50
..a:;;;~1- st ro ngbo xes
22 · 30 • 50
65
',..
Ooo.men1 Cat>orl8t
~ sate
,...
Floor sate for bookkeeping
documents and cash
'),
Roll-front cabinet for valuables
Bank deposit boxH rented out
t,_.,.. ....,.....,,.,
-
lYPtCAL SIZES : FIRE PROOF DOCUMENT CABINETS
Number of
INTERNAL DIMENSION
EXTERN A L DIMENSION
shelves
Height Width Depth Height Width Depth
2
39
55
f,()
97
70
120
3
34
50
125
55
70
155
4
39
80
f,()
172
95
195
Size
ldoor
2door
....,_· a-
DOCUMENT CABINET with INTERNAL SAFE
INTERNAL DIMENSION
Height Width
Depth
150
70
so
137
57
41
195
95
so
182
82
41
EXTERNAL DIMENSION
Height Width Depth
Source: Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Data. 3'd ed. Oxford:
Soura : Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Data. fd ed. Oxfo,d :
Review Module on Architectural Design
Iii.-
Chspt"r 5 : 6USJNESS FACILJrJES
d. Legal Department
Attends to bank's legal business
e. Data Processing Department
Processes bank's payrolls, operations and other
5'l
36
36
36
41
102
41
f. Mail Room
Contain addressograph, microfilm equipment, duplicating
I
65
2
procedures
ter ArdlitK!'s Doto. f'1 ed.
td, 1000.
machines and other equipment.
Should be located near a service yard or elevator in close
coordination with the printing/purchasing department.
•
s me e plo ees lounge/snack bar, comfort room,
I equ pment and maintenance.
•
Depa
ent
Fu ct1ons for the care and safekeeping for the
3. Recent Trends In Bank Design
•
Shop-tlke retail environment
•
Fully glazed or open frontages to create a more inviting
•
Services that are dealt with as products to be 'sold' by staff
image
~ta es, funds or anything of value which were
trained to deal with customers in a friendly, attractive
committed 10 t he ca re of the bank for the
environment.
safe eeping, use or benefit of the owner.
•
More space given to customer and designs with better use of
light and color, prominent merchandising and designated
c.
£ ec
sales, comfortable waiting areas and private interview
SJ, e
ices or
e senior vice president, board members and
rooms.
pres.dent including their personnel.
d
oom and boar
,res provisions for a conference r
mee ing room.
RBview Module on Architectural Deeign
12G
Cha12ter 6:
STITUTIONAL BUILDINGS
- --
- -- - - - - - - ; , ; R e v i ~
·ew:;;-,;;Mo~dukoreo;;,;:;nAr=:;;;;chite~ct~ura;.;;:I
De;;.;;sig;-Jn
- -
Chapter 6 : INS11"fU1IONAL t,UILDINGS
,._ r,fflNITlON
lnstitut,onaf Occup ncy includes the use of a building or
rructure, or a p rt,on thereof, in which care or supervision is
f"0""1ed to person who are or are not capable of self-preservation
, I assistance or in which persons are detained for
pena cornartttmal purposes or in which the liberty of the
occupants 1s restricted.
s..
OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATIONS
1. PO 1096
ajority of institutional occupancies are included in Group
O in the National Building Code of the Philippines. Group D
is subdivided into three divisions:
• Division 0-1
Institutional Occupancy where personal liberties
of in-mates are restrain , or quarters of those
rendering public assistance and maintaining
peace and order
Principal Use: mental hospitals, mental sanitaria,
mental asylums, police & fire stations, guara
houses, jails, prisons, reformatories, leprosaria,
and quarantine stations
Accessory Use: Welfarenomes, orphanages, boys
and-girls town, home for the aged, rehabilitation
and vocational training center, military camps,
penitentiary and correctional inSt itutions
•
Division D-2
Institutional Occupancy for Healthcare
Principal use: hospitals, sanitaria, home for the
aged, nurseries for children more than 5
•
Division 0-3
Institutional Occupancy for Ambulatory patients
or children over kindergarten age
Principal Use: Nursing homes for ambulatory
patients, school and home for children,
orphanages
As defined by other codes and sources, there are
Institutional Type Buildings distributed in other Groups
listed by PD 1096:
•
Division A-1
Accessory use: multi-purpose/barangay hall,
clinic, convalescing home, health center
•
Division A-2
Principal use: military or police barracks/
dormitories, outpatient clinics, family planning
clinics, lying-in clinics, diagnostic clinics, medical
and clinical laboratories
Conditional use: sanitaria, nursery, convalescing
homes
•
Division C-1
Principal Use: Civic or Government Centers, other
types of government buildings
J
Chapter 6 : INSTITUTIO NA L BUILD INGS
•
Division C-2
•
Accessory Use· gov
.
ernment c t
hospitals, medical cent
en ers, general
.
ers, multi-pu
.
em b ass,es / consulates
rpose cltnics,
Division E-1
•
Accessory Use: Embassy/ C
Division E-2
onsulate
Principal Use: Police and fire stations
Accessory Use· g
h
.
· enera I osp1tals, specialized
general welfare institution, charitable &
government institutions
2.
C. ZONING CLASSIFICATIONS
•
of institutional use or occupancy, characterized mainly as
a low-rise, medium rise, or high rise st(Uct~e for
educational, training, and related activities
D. DEVELOPMENTAL CONTROLS
1 M axlmum Total Gross Floor Area {Table VJl.1 of PD 1096)
RA 9514
Healthcare - Health care facilities are those used for
purposes of medical or other treatment or care of
persons where such occupants are mostly incapable of
self preservation because of age, physical or mental
disability, or because of security measures not under
the occupants' control.
b. Detention & Correctional - Detention and correctional
buildings are those used to house one or more persons
under varied degrees of restraint or security where
such occupants are mostly incapable of selfpreservation because of security measures not und er
the occupants' control. It shall also Include those used
for purposes such as correctional institutions,
detention faci lities, community residential cent rs,
d substance abus
training "hool ' work camps, an f d r housed under
cent rs wh re occupants are con ,n
wm d gr e of r traint or security
a.
°
General Institutional (GI) - a community to national level
Interior
and
End Lot
Inside
Lot
Corner
Through
Lot
Lot
BHLx
50%of
TLA
BHLx
50%
of TLA
BHLx
60%of
Tl.A
BHLx
60% of
8Hlx
60%of
TLA
Tl.A
BHLx
60%of
BHLx
60%
BHL
70% of
8HLx
70%of
BHL x
70%of
TLA
of TLA
Tl.A
TLA
Tl.A
CornerThrough
Lot
Corner
Lot
Abutting
3 or
More
Streets,
Rivers
etc.
Institutional
without
Sprinklers &
Firewalls
BHLx
&<>"'of
TLA
Institutional
with
Sprinklers &
Firewalls
2.
8HL11
70%of
Tl.A
Building He'sht Umlt (From Table VU.2 of PD 1096)
•
15 OOm or BHL of Major Zon of Occ.upancy
3. Floor to lot Aru Ratio (From Table VII.G.2 of PD 1096)
•
Fl.AR • 2 SO
Rev tJW Module o-n Archl-Uct:.u,..-1 Deelen
Chapter- 6: 1NS1l1U110
,.
--
M.iJ(lmum Allowable Percentage of Site Occupancy,
1mpemous Surfa.ce Area, Unpaved Surface Area, and
Total Open Sp.ice wi thin lot (Table VIII 1 of PD 1096)
c~ract r of
l])e/Occupancv
ind Zoning
M imum
All wable
Maximum
Allowable ISA
PSO
50%
1 Flfewall
60%
Minimum
USA
20%
30%
20%
20%
TOSL (ISA+
USA)
50%
40%
5. Minimum Setbacks (Table Vlll.3 of PD 1096)
ROW Width
Front (meters) Side (meters)
Rear (meters)
(meten)
I
I
!
I
!
30& above
25 to 29
20 to 24
10 to 19
Below 10
GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
PARAMETERS
PD 1096
National Building Code
% of Total Lot Area (TLA)
1nst1M1onal
w/o F,rewall
1
Inst, utt0nal w/
I
E.
NAL. e>UIL.DING5
8
5
6
5
3
5
5
3
2
2
Occupant Loads
Unit Area Per Occupant
(sqm)
11
(sleeping)
8.4
Hospitals, Sanitaria
22
Nursing Homes,
(inpatient
Children's Homes,
treatment) 7.4
Homes for the Aged
,_
Detention and
Correctional
~
1
Maximum Distance to
- 45 m without Sprinkler
Exits (Hospitals)
Systems
~
5
3
60 m with Sptfnkter
Systems
3
2
2
6. Parting Requirements (From Table Vll.4 of PD 1096)
• Pubtic hospitals, mental hospitals, sanitaria, and
mental asylums -1 car slot for every 25 beds
• Private hospitals - 1 car slot for every 12 beds
• Nursing homes, school and home for children, and
orphanages - 1 car slot for every 12 beds
RA9514
Fire Code of the
Philippines
Unit Area per
Occupant (sqm)
11.1 (Sleeping)
23.1 (Inpatient
Treatment )
11.1
30 m from any
Room Door
intended as Exit
46 m from any
Point in the Room
15 m from any
Maximum Distance to
Exits (Detention and
Correctional)
point in a sleeping
room
45 m without Sprinkler
30 m from any
Systems
Room Door
intended as an Exit
60 m with Sprinkler
Systems
- 46 m f rom a ny
Point in the Room
10 m from a ny
point in a Sleeping
Room
·30
Review Module on Archlte t
c ura1 Design
I
--
Chapter 6: IN5itTUTIONAL ~UILDINGS
RA 9S14
f ire Code of the
Phlll pines
244m
G.
BP 344
Accessibility
law
1.83m
1. Principles of Design
•
Convenient Access to both Staff and the Public
The facility should be accessible to the staff for
convenience of commuting or driving to the area.
With the potential numbers of the Public going to
transact business in the facility every day, it is best to
put the facility in an area t hat Wltl minim ize the travel
time of the Public
•
1.12 m
1.2m
1:12
1:12
Expansion Spaces
With the ever increasing demand for both the Public
and Staff in terms of services and spaces, it is
necessary to plan ahead and locate potential spaces
for expansion.
•
'·
i
MENT SUILOINGS
Govef-r
t uikiings are structures designed to provide
p rpose of seC\Jrity, protection and governance of
• ,.._.wn-n~
ese ra ge from municipal to national levels of
t
o r a group of buildings for the
•
ra 10n and service of a Municipality.
c...n-rnnrrs Palace - S ilar to a City Hall, a Governor's
r · · Ha ll serves as the administrative
~ e r o a Provi ce o Region
• E has.sy / Consulate - a building for the operation of
"""""'"' "tic nctions and relations with another country.
•
•
•
Structures
I
Adequate Parking Spaces
As with accessibility, it is necessary to provide enough
par~ng spaces on-site and off-site of the facility
locate facility in a location where off-site parking can
be utilized by the Public (i.e . Malls, Public Par ing
Areas etc.)
2. Detennlning Needs
•
Analysis of the Operational Policies and Work Flow of the
Staff and the Public
Research existing facilities and Architectural
References
Obtain from the Client their current operational
policies as well as possible future changes.
-------~~~---_:_----------:====-=--:-~------Depa
ent Buildings
Review Module on Archlte-ctural Design
Chapter- 6: INSTITUTIONAL 6UILDINGS
Study work flows as these act·,v·t· h
' ies s ould be
reflected on the Floor Plan of th e Des,gn
.
•
-
Obtain a 11st of staff from the department head and
make sure to inquire of a y future Increases in the
staff
Requirements per Department
Obtain.from Department Heads and Execut,ve
.
Committee of the Facility
As the Architect, balance the requirements of the
Department Heads with the EXECOM as these are not
always the same.
Make sure to obtain the requirements as early a
possible in the design process but be ready for s
changes as policies, department heads and
requirements can change in the middle of the design
•
Storage Requirements
•
-
Storage of various items such as office materials,
equipment and other essentials for the operation of
the facility should have adequate space in the area.
- The production of Documents in any government
facility will be very substantial
Facilities are usually required to keep documents for
a certain period of time
Make sure to locate in an area of the facility that will
have minimal chance of ignition as these places have
a high Fire load
Relationship between each Department
It is important to research which departments need a
Direct, Indirect or Non-relationship with the other
departments of the Facility.
Government Facilities hav a high degree of directed
activity flo ; staff and public going to specific
departments to transact documents and other
materials. Making sure those departments that
should be adjacent to each other is important in
design.
Data are obtained by interviews with Department
Heads, End-users, Activity Flows and Operational
Policies.
Number of Employees
- Determining the number of employees will aide in
allocation of the spaces allotted to each department.
•
Anticipate Future Space Requirements of the Facility
\
3. Zoning and Activities of Public & Private Spaces
• Reduce Activities that will make the Public Stay ln the
facility more than necessary
- Since the facility will function more efficiently if the
public can finish the activities they need to do in the
facility with the shortest possible time, it Is essential to
reduce spaces that will make the public stay longer
- locate such spaces (restaurants, shops etc) away from
areas that are already congested with sovernment
activities
---------------------;:=~~=~:::=~=7Rev Ie w Module on Ar-chltectur-al Design
•
f th
F
tlity sho uld b
w h re Gover nment Activitie
not ~u1re cont ct With the Public h
-
•
A Balance between the need of Aesthetics and the
actual usage of the building should be a primary
design consideration of the Architect
h
I st at does
s ou d be clear so
uce cross tra ffic between the spaces
0-s pttons due to ~eople going where they shouldn't
be
g ~n be avo,~ed with proper design
Securi w ,11 a lso be improved with clear zoning of th
p
ate an d public areas.
e
t
Chapter 6: INSTITUTIONAL BUILDINGS
I
e c early segregated
red
4. Construction & Materials
•
Specify Low Maintenance / High Durability Materials
With the low priority given to the maintenance of
buildings, it is important as the Architect to specify
maintenance reducing materials
High Traffic Materials such as Heavy Duty (3mm)
Vinyl Sheets, Smooth Cem.ent Finish etc can be
considered for Floors as these are low maintenance
materials with very high durability •
•
Facility should be designed to accommodate expansion
and renovation of interior spaces
•
Construction should consider connections to new
expansion areas.
E s r e Smooth Activ ity Flow of all Transactions in the
fa Ir
-
Usualty should only have 2 Storeys to reduce Foot
-
raffle withtn t he space
With the number of Activities in the Facility, reducing
the need for vertical access use to a minimum is
ecessary to reduce travel and activity time for the
Public
•
Analysi s of relationships between Departme ts is cruci al
in
•
Oesign
Should Function more as an Office Building than a
Monumentai Building"
Though government facilities should exude an
f M onumental Building, it should not
appearance o a
ffi
·1ding
be forgotten that it is essentially an O ice 8_ui
ts and other items
for the processing of d~cu~en f the Public and the
n ecessary for the functioning 0
Government
---
s.
General Spaces in the Building
•
Departments that require a direct relationship to the
Public.
- Departments such as Cashiers, Applicati_o n are some.of
the examples
- Should be located in an area that can easily be
accessed by the public such as the periphery of the
facility
•
Departments that accommodates a Specific Class of the
Public
- Senior Cit izens & Specific Professionals
Review Module on Architectural Design
=-
Chapter 6: INSTITUTIONAL 6UILDINGS
•
•
•
Other Civic Departments such a p b .
Police etc.
s u fie Works, Fire,
2.
a.
Offices and Conference Area fo r M a1or
. Off · I
Court Rooms (for Judicial Halls)
,c,a s and Staff
• Records and Storage Area
• Staff Rooms and lounges
• Service and Maintenance Spaces
• Utility Rooms
• Effective Circulation Areas
b.
b. Security & Control - due to the nature of end-users and
the staff of the facility, strict zoning and control points
should be a priority in the design.
c.
Understanding of Human Behavior - an understanding of
how people interact with one another is important in the
design of the facility. As the space is specifically designed
to control the social and physical aspects of human
interaction, a grasp of human behavior is a necessary
temporary detention of persons held for
investigation or preliminary earings after arrest.
Jails/ Detention Facilities - buildings that houses
persons awaiting trial and convicted offenders
serving short sentences, usually a maximum of 1
Year
c.
d.
G. CORRECTIONAL FACILITIES
1. Oesjgn Guidelines
a. Number of and Types of Inmates - Facilities should
consider these during design so as to ensure that the
space is designed to accommodate the appropriate type
of inmates
Types of Fadlltkl
Lockups/ Holding Cells - Security facilities for the
3.
Correctional Institutions/ risons - Facilities for
convicted person,-servlng sentences.
Community Correctional Centers - Facilities similar
to Prisons but fosters a more rehabllltative
atmosphere and closer intesration ta the
community
Security levels and housing types
a. Minimum Security - consists of open dormitories
which house non-vfolent offenders. Maximum of 50
inmates can be housed in one dormitory. Double
beds and common toilets are commonly used.
b. Medrum Security - has perimeter security and control
systems which allow less restrictive movements for
the inmates than in maximum security. It consists of
individual cells, semi-private rooms, or dorm,·tor·
,JeS,
or a combination of several types.
step in design.
--------------------;:::::-;:~;:::~:;:===~-=-:----Review Module on Architectural Deelgn
I
I
I
•
aximum securitf
- has the highest level of custody and
.
M .
~
sup ervisron
· · and consists only of sin1Je-cells with one or two beds.
.
rison " surrounded by a perimeter wall or fence and access
The p ·
·
rs strictly monitored.
~Lr\.J I JWu'~
r,
..
I
..
MEDIUM SECURITY CELL
MAXIMUM SECURITY CELL
□
SIOE
Source: De Chiara, Joseph and Michael Crosbie. Time saver
andards for Building Types. ih ed. McGraw-Hill, 2001.
st
,_UOHT
SHELF&
~
th
e. me 5aver
source: De Chiaro, Joseph and Michael Crosb,· n
2001
Standards for Building Types. 4 ed. McGraw-Hill,
_
tc:,evleW Module on Archiuctur.al Deeign
I
cdep
Chapt4'r 6 : INSTITUTIONAL 5UILDINGS
4,
R
ptf
n
ltw1t•1: ptl ,, ,r,,
I 1II
I
1
'
• " '·
1:>rov de P~ c• for th following
·''-' ' it (',;:
7.
Recreation
Places for recreation inside the facility should be provided to
help In the rehabilitation of the inmates. It may · Indoor or
outdoor. An Indoor gymnasium should be able to function as
a venue for sports, entertainment, and assembly.
8.
Vlsltln1 Areas
Visiting areas may either be contact o ,aoncontact. ontact
visits allow inmates ad visitors together in a large room under
supervision. Non-contact visits are done in cubicles where the
inmate and the visitor are separated by a wall. Speak holes dr'
telephones ~y be provided as means of communication for
non-contact 'ltstts.
., e,,ol-.lt1ij
l>. ttlp
rc h
hl
r ,mfl " 'W lothlng I u
l,,s ti, .HI n lntervlt•w
ti. \ii .11 c.: ~unln.,t l "
t. t lnijt rp, lntlns
N, Ph t gr. phinA
h, H u:-i ns :s l~nn, nt
I
d.
n I kltch . Star g and
tor/ toff ·hould be pro ided.
n
"Fb
:
ntto kitch n
u ngs unll
f ttn
fth
bo
9.
Other services
a.
ormation center which should be located near
the housing units or classrooms if the prison has an
educational facility
b. Commtsslly is where inmates purchase personal items.
It may be located on a fixed station or a mobile cart
moving to and from the housing units
Library ,..
rrecti n I facility should
ch
up nd consultat ion
mate_ th t require emight medical
II
'I ,
1
mens correcticmal facility
~
--
~Sourl:P: ~ Otioro, J~ph ond Michael~- Ti e 5cM!t" Sta.idc:wds
for B
T)'pe,S. ~ ~ - McGrow-HilJ, 2CXJL
Review Module on Archrtect-ural Des~
Chapter 6 : INSTT1U1IONAL ~UILDINGS
c. Barber or beauty shop - should be located near the
housing units. ~t may have one to three chairs de endin
on the population of the facility
P
g
10. security Facllties
a. Central Control Room -
room where all access areas are
erectronically m onitored 24 hours a da . It is equipped
with an electronic security system integrating door
control, video surveillance, security communications and
safety systems. It shall be ideally located near the main
put,,ic entrane, adjacent to the lobby or within the secure
perimeter.
b. Silyport- is an entrance vestibule with doors and gates at
each end where all vehicles entering the correctional
facility are searched by officers. Only one door or gate
should be open at any time.
11.
ftllrWni Areas
Parting areas should be provided for staff, visitors, and
deliveries such as food and laundly. Bus parking slots may
also be provided for the transport of inmates.
H. POUCE STATIONS
The main ob1·ectives of a police station are to provide public
·
· ers .
service and to handle o r process the pnsoner5.
The pnson
shall not be mixed w ith the people and thus separation of th e'.r
.
.
t
to be considered m
entrances to the facilrty ,s required. Fae ors ·
.
f
O
design a Police station are functional relationship or zonr~g
•
.
and secunty. It ,s
~s, economy of space, public convenience,
f storeys of the
more economical to minimize the num b er O
b 0f
~ n since less number of floors would require less num er
~rity personnel.
1. Site Requirements
The police station should be in a separate location from other
structures for security purposes. Jail quarters shall be located
far enough from the public entrance but accessible through a
loading space,
2.
Relationship of Spaces
a. Public Area
The public information and complaint desk should be
near the police service facilltles. Public telephones should
be placed away from the main information desk tD avoid
interruptions.
b. Service Facillties
Thewmmunications center and records room should be
located back to back to allow exchange of Information.
They should be located in a private and secured area.
Only police officer/s on duty should have access to these
rooms. The prope,tyn,e,lwhere evidence and
recovered properties should be located near the public
information desk.
c. Detention and Related Fadllties
Prisoner facilities should be located near the sevice
facilities to reduce the requirement for jail-keeping staff.
The outside entrance to the jail should open to a drive-in
garage. A storage area for prisoner's personal property
should be provided within the booking area, Gta storap
should be provided near the ,ail entrance where police
officers may surrender their weapons before entering the
detention areas. There should be separate cells for male
and female prisoners. Each cell should have a toilet and a
washbowl.
Review Module on Architect-ur.al Deelgn
Chapter 6: INSTITUTIONAL BUILDINGS
t, e Offices
h, f and comm
I
a d n arthe pub1·
and officers
1c area t
.
td int rrupt1ons H
o maintain
police office;wever, they should be
s entrance to the
•
~m•~ ·
~
Sp.Ke Requirements for a Police Stat·
~·
~n
.2 m)
fere ce room: may be combined with courtroom
Coopet'ating officer's r
(2.4 3 _0 m)
Central records section
ap space
dassroom
•
•
e (2.
Ltbrary
Storage
I entificat ion printing room
Prisone rs, and Jail Facilities
nn1111r-m garage (3 .6 x 7.5 m)
ing, searching room
Medical examination room
•
•
•
Maintenance Requirements
- Janitor's room
•
Courts
Police courtroom (4.8 x 6.9 m)
Clerk's office combined with attorney's room
One isolation cell
One violent cell
..
.,
(2.7X 2.7m)
Attorney's room combined with interview room
Tank
Oayroom: combined with tank
Toilet : in ce lls
Shower
Attorney's interview room
"th 1·anitor's room
d
Storage:
combine
w,
Storage of pnsoners' propertY (1.2 >< 1•8 fll)
PrisonerS' waiting space to courtroom (1.2 x 2.4 m)
Pantry
- One isolation cell for women
- Shower, toilet for women prisoners
- Matron' s room, combined with examination room
- Matron's toilet
Receiving and Assisting Public
- Separate entrance foyer
- Public toilets: male and female
Public telephone: in foyer
- Complaint counter
Police Personnel Requirements
Lockenuoms (1.8 x 2.4 m)
- Toilet:-com lned with janitor's room
Police Property Requirements
- Storage of recovered stolen bicycles: a,mbined with
meter repair (3.6 x 7.2 m)
- Storage of recovered stolen property
- Storage of police supplies (2.4 x 2.4 m)
-
•
_
Public Safety Education
Safety, combined with main office
--------;;:::i::~~~-;;Ar~~~;;ii"o:~;~view Moc::lule on Archl-t;eat.ural Deeign
.
•
Chapter 6: 1Ns-rrru·nONAL ~UILDINGS
•un
I.
FIRE STATIONS
1. Planning Considerations
The main goal in designing a fire station Is to shorten the
turnout time, the dispatching time, and the travel time of
the fire fighters. This can be achieved by arranging the flow
patterns to be direct as possible. This will reduce the time
for preparation and movements to the fire station exit. It is
also important to include facilities that will provide comfort
and enhance the physical fitness of the fire fighters.
2.
Concept Plans
•
One-way Straddle of the Apparatus Area
- Support functions are located beside the apparatus
area. It has the longest travel distancen and adds to the
turnout time
11amc
Ul'OITS
Cl)Uffl.11
..,
"' "'
COUIIT llOOII
15'•u·
.,...
•
UUMCl
SAMPLE FLOOR PlAN OF A POLICE STATION
Source: De Chiara, Joseph and M '
Standards for Building T
u, ichae/ Crosbie. Time Sew
ypes. 4 ed McG
er
.
raw-Hill, 2001.
Review Module on Archlte
ctural Deelgn
..
Chapter 6 : INSTITUTIONAL BUILDINGS
•
Is ideal when an area for expansion is desired
Sou~: De Oliara, Joseph and M ichael Crosbie. Time Saver
Standards for Building Types. ,ti' ed. McGraw-Hill, 2001.
™
l:jff rf1,-J
•
-
Af.lA~ ,,,._ ~St'&JUt fOJJc'TloH
wo-way Straddle o t h e Apparatus Area
7le ~
separates the noisy areas from the quiet
- eas o the e statio
second most ideal of
concep · plans
3.
Adjacency Relationships
M inimizing the turnout time in a fire station can be achieved
by grouping the spaces based on their functional activities.
Spaces tha1 bel ong in one group shall be p laced near with
each other to deliver a fast response during emergency.
a.
•
f
Primary
Adjacenc
y Spaces
Must be directfty connected in a physicaJ manner to
each other or dirertty to the apparatus ar ea. Primary
adjacency spaces indude :
Otspat.cher-housewatch area, lobby area
Adm in offices
lutchen/reaeation/gym/ trarni ng area
Lounge
------~•:__ _::~~-~~~,::~~-"~the
~~A::pa~-~a!~~us.~/.J=e.2=-------------;~~:-i~~.~
Oa~s.Arch~ral
sc~r~o;;
om
;;faa:;;·lity
:· ~~;:~::-1Review Module on
Design
Chapter 0 : INSTl"fUTIONAL BUILDINGS
t
Do rm,t
Tot
4 • Parking Bays and Appliances
G
b
•
c
e
•
midway location In the fire tatlon
P ndency o f function during
10ns h t are not of primary importa nee.
ry d J c ncy paces include:
G n ral shop, storage, repair area
Cleanup are s
Hose torage/drying area
~
Lf!V I Adjacency Spaces
Least used spac s and have no direct operational
r~a •onshtp to the primary and secondary adjacency
rooms. T rtiary adjacency spaces include:
Apparatu s parts storage
UtiHti s and generator area
Locker room
Miscellaneous storage area
Show er area, laundry and drying area
Admin ar eas not related to response action
Conf erence/public areas
Other spaces not related to response action
rd
Source: Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Data. 3 ed.
Oxford: Blackwell Science Ltd, 2000.
b. Dimensions of Parking Bay
park111g bay
s,,e
width w 1 m in .
leng th I min.
1
4.5
8
4.5
4.6
4.5
10
12.5
10 be avoided
whenever possible
2
3
4
12.5
door
(passage width w 1
>< passage hei ght)
-
.,,,--- i,r
3.5 x 3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5 >< 3.5
3.5 X 4
not e there are some v ery large new appliances 1n use: these might require larger
bay areas and door w idths
Source: Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Data. 3'd ed.
Oxford: Blackwell Science ltd, 2000.
...______________________________________FRe~v~l~e~w;;M~o~d;u~le;-:;o~n~AArr~c~h~l~te:;:c;t~u;r;a~ICD;e;.;e;l0;n:J.
I ..
Chapter 6 : IN5TJTUTIONAL BUILDINGS
c. Dimensions of Fire Service Ap p1ances
1.
910$5 veh1<:I~ wheelbase turning
weight lltgl
\mm)
circle 0
!mm)
~
(58001
1,90 (7 4901
11:m 01 500)
2600
d
11700 ISi
15050 I f )
16100 IF)
3200
3750
Minimum Space Requirements for a Fire Station
Minimum Area
Spaces
(sqm)
Appliance room
55
Storage room
55
Trainina room
220
Ancillary spaces
55
Shower, washroom, changing and
165
drying rooms
length width maJ1. height
<mm) (mm) With loaded
roof Imm)
5650
6400
2170
2410
8000 2470
~
2800
2950
3090
IIQWtlw
hole•eel
10200 ( 110001
3750
16100 (F)
7600 2470
3100
17490)
,0100 1SOO)
lS900 i 16000)
3200
3200
3500
1-SOO !Fl
14400 (f )
15400 (F)
6250 2'10
6450 2470
6700 2500
2850
Wirtl tri Tro TLF 16 11500 112000)
JOO()
7300 (7490)
'»-Tl t~r 2000
10100 111600)
3750
3200
3200
16100 (Fl
l'SOO (Fl
14400 (Fl
7000 2470
6100 2410
6450 2410
2990
3250
3300
, ~ 1130001
uoo
18600 IS)
9800 2430
3250
""
ei,Oef •
tan~ TLF 8.'18
~ ender • l•nk TLF 16.,?S
•ender • lank TLF 2&/50
7490
n
ori t~
f
:. r:
I
aoie liddet Ol.30
2990
3270
IMth
powe,ed
~rncl
~dde1 LBJM, with
20200 1210001
19900 (Fl
3800 .
9800 2490
3300
1320
I
nl tr ud RW1
!'CJ"Oment truck RW2
"I05e truck SW 7000
7200 (74901
, ~ (110001
10200 t l 1000)
14800 IF)
16100 IF)
14400 IF)
3200
3750
3200
s,oo
7600 2480
2850
3070
2500
2980
6500
2420
~
~
Watch room, restroom, and mess
'-- room
Administration office
Station Commander's room
Control room
Hose service.workshop, hose wash,
,.
and testro_orn_
Hose store_
Hose drying tower
Breatfilng apparatus workshop
Rooms1fo r breathing apparatus
servicing
Vehicle and appliance workshop
includinaoattery char:ging point
Vehicle wash bay
Heating and fuel storage rooms
r
165
µ
55
55
55
440 1
55
55
220
220
no
220
_J.Y
--
55
rd
~rce: Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Data. 3 ed. Oxford:
lackwe/1 Science Ltd, 2000.
Source: Neufert, Ernst ond Peter. Architect's Data. 3' d ed. Oxford:
Blackwell Science Ltd, 2000.
.
,
s. Other spaces and facilities to
•
•
e considered
Chapter 6: INSTITUTIONAL BUILDINGS
room with 1V for traini
- udro-visua l equipment . ng P~rposes
is required f
I
reco rd ed videos are com
.
or c assrooms sin
man in the tr . .
ce
aining sessions.
Kitchen & Dining Room
- shall be made with durable a d
CZl0
1Zl0
tuit-._,m,y
n easy-to-cfean materia s
•
Dormitory and locker rooms
- shall consider separation for pr,·vacYan d noise.
.
I
•
Recreation areas and gym
- a smaJf gym may be included in the fire station to
promote physical fitness of the fire fighter
•
Slide Poles
- inclusion ofslide poles for two-storey fire stations are
not advisable because they usually cause injuries to the
''
'""" 'IO 11Ult11&0I(-.
~-~
I
---
:3
hters
6. Site Requirements
The setback should be a minimum of 9 meters to ·
·
fi
· Tile
accommodate the fargest fire truck m the ire service.
.
.
h
modate the turning
main street shall be wide enoug to accom
h
"bl additional spaces a 11
radius of the fire trucks. When poss, e, k to avo1"d tra tt·1c
be allotted for the backing-up of t e t rue
SAMPLE FLOOR PLAN OF A ONE-STOREY FIRE STATION
source: De Chiara, Joseph and Michael Crosbie. Time Saver
Standards for Building Types. 4'" ed. McGraw-Hill, 2001.
.
•
I
COllgEStio.l"and acciden~
~view Module on Archrt-ectural Design -
------------------------
J. HOSPfTALS
A
pit.a l i cl health-care inst itutio n th
at Provides t
~,alued st ff and qu,pment.
~
reatment by
-
1.
la
~
Chapter 6 : INS,l,UTIONAL l3UILOINGS
•
All Level 1& 2 Services
Teaching Unit for the 4 Major Clinical Services
- Clinical, Emergency, Outpatient, Ancillary
and Support Services
Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation Unit
- Ambulatory Surgical Clinic
•
Dialysis Clinic
~
~·,...A AGJ
Tertiary Lab with Hrstopatho/; ; ··
Blood Bank
t___ __ /
rd
3 Level X-Ray
\_,.-7 ~ ~ ·
?J
d nsifkations of Hospitals by the O
r,-- ,
{DOH]
epartment of Health
ti.
Level 3 Hospital
Genera/ Hospital
• ~ I l Hospital
A lev el 1 hospital shall has the f,0 11 .
. .•
. · Is
•
owmg fac1l1t1es ·
Cl
mica erv,ces for In-Patients - M d ' .
.
p d'
•
e 1cme
e 1atncs, 08-GYNE and Surgery
'
Emergency and Out-Patient Services
+
Isolation Facilities
Surgical I Maternity Facilities
Dental Clinic
Secondary Clinical Laboratory
Blood Station
st
1 Level X- Ray
b. Specialty Hospital - Hospitals that specializes and caters
to a specific condition, disease or demographic
Trauma Center - Hospitals that specifically handles
emergency cases and trauma based cases; i.e. wounds,
fractures etc.
c.
Pharmacy
Other Healthcare Facilities
d.
•
level 2 Hospital
A level 2 hospital shall has the following facilities:
All Level 1 Services
Departmentalized Clinical Services
Respiratory Unit
General Intensive Care Unit
High Risk Pregnancy Unit
Neonatal Intensive Care Unit
Tertiary Clinical Laboratory
Primary Healthcare Facility - facilities for the
diagnosis and treatment of very m inor diseases and
ailments. Patients will be sent to Hospitals after in itial
diagnosis in this Facility if necessary.
With In-Patient Beds : Infirmary / Dispensary
Birthing Home
'
•
-
Without In-Patient Bed: Medical Out-Patient and
OFWC/inics
..
Blood Station
2 nd Level X-Ray with Mobile Unit
■
I ----------------------------;~;:-;;~~~~~~~::-)-I
Review Module on Archlt..ctural Design -
6· 1Ns-rrru·noNAL ~UILDINGS
Chapter
•
, c
odial Care Facility - f acilities for the care of a
certain type of patient demography or illness that
require extensive amounts of time for treatment or
care.
Psychiatric Care Facility
Drug Abuse Treatment and Rehabilitation Center
- Sanitarium
Leprosarium
Nursing Home
.
re Facility - various types
Ambulatory Outpatient Ca
or more medical
of facilities that focuses onffon: to Patients.
treatments as its central o ermg
.
• Dialysis Clinic
• Ambulatory Surgery Clinic
.
• .. ) IVF Center - In Vitro Fe~_ilizat1on.
• Radiation Oncology Facility
• Oncology Center/ Clinic
~ • Stem cell Therapy Clinic
•
,
Diagnostic/ Therapeutic Care Facility - Facilities that
operates a specific diagnostic or therapeutic medical
procedure.
o
1'
o
U
,/V
c. Safety
~~
-u
-
~.~~~
Nuclear Medicine
~
'..#1\.) ,
DOH Guidelines in Hospital Planning & Design
b. Occupants
- building designed for other purpose shall n ot be
converted into a hospital
- shall comply with all local zoning o rdinances
Radiological Facility
v
~
- Ionizing Machine.s: X-Ray, CT Scan, 1 ••
Mammograpliy
Non - Ionizing.Machines: Ultrasound,
~'
MRI
Eye Center
a. Environment
- shall be accessible to the community and free from
noise, smoke, dust. foul odor, &flood
- shall not be located to railroads, freight yards, children's
playground, airports, industrial & disposal plants
Laboratories
Clinical Lab/ HIV Laboratory
Blood Service Laboratory
Drug Test Laboratory
New Born Screening Laboratory
Water Quality Laboratory .
/)
o
2.
·
,.,,'.~
)
L ~/
- exits shall be restricted to: door leading directly outside
the building, interior stair, ramp, and exterior stair
• minimum of 2 exits remote from each other in eve
floor of the building
ry
- exits shall terminate directly at an ope
outside of the building
n space to the
Review Module on Arc~itectural Design
!.
Chapter 6: INSTITUTIONAL BUILDINGS
d. Security
- shall ensure the security f
o person and
the f ac1·1·1ty
property within
j. Waste Disposal
· liq~id waste shall discharge into public sewerage system
- solid waste shall be collected, treated, and disposed
e. Patient Movement
- corridor width for patient &
- corridor width in areas not u::~lf ment access: 2.44 m
equipment: 1.83
or bed, stretcher, &
m
- ramp or elevator shall be provided f
.
d
.
or ancillary, clinical
an nursing areas located on the upper floor ,
- ramp atshacc_etss to the entrance not on the same level of
es, e
Sanitation
- utilities for maintenance of sanitary system shall be
provided
k. Housekeeping
- shall provide & maintain a healthy & aesthetic
environment for patients, personnel, & public
I. Maintenance
f. Lighting
- sufficient illumination to promote comfort, healing, &
recovery
- shall have effective building maintenance program
- shall be kept in state of good repair to prevent untimely
breakdown of buildings and equipment
m. Material Specification
- floors, walls, ceilings shall be of sturdy material that
shall allow durability, ease of cleaning, & fire resistance
g. Ventilation
- adequate ventilation to ensure comfort
h. Auditory and Visual Privacy
- acceptable sound level and adequate visual seclusion
n. Segregation
- wards shall observe segregation of sexes
- 1 toilet for every 8 patients or personnel
for acoustical and privacy requirements
i. Water Supply
t
- shall be connected to the public water supply sys em
whenever available
. .
ate and free of
- shall be potable, safe for drinking, adequ '
cross connections
o. Fire Protection
- fire alarms on walls, peepliofes in doors, smoke
detectors in ceilings
- fire extinguishers and fire hoses
•
I
'
Chapter 6: INSrlrUTlONAL BUILDINGS
p s,gnage
- effective graphic system/visu a1a,.ds to P
and mortuary. They shall be located in areas
away from normal traffic
.d
,nformation, orientation' d,·rect·ron rdenffi
.
rov, . e
11
prohibition, warning, & notice
'
cat1on,
s. Function
- emerge"%located in ground floor
- admin located near the matn entrance
• surgical and operating COOfll shall be remote from
entrance
· dressing room located to avoid exposure to dirty areas
- nurse station located to permit visual observation,
nurse station for everv. 35 beds
· n~rsery separate but accessible from the delivery room
- dietary service shall be at lea 2S meters from morgue
q. Parking
· l parting slot for every 25 beds
r. Zoning
- areas in the hospital shall be grouped int0 h
.
zones:
t e followrng
~ r zone ~ areas immediately accessible the
publ'.c: eme:gency, outpatient, apd
adm1mstrat1ve services. They shall be located
near the entrance of the hospital
• Second zone - areas that receive workload from
the outer zone: laboratory, pharmacy, an
radiology. J he shall be located near the outer
zone
• Inner zone_- areas that provide nursing care and
management of patients: nursing service They
shall be located in private areas but accessible to
•
guests
•
•
Deep zone - areas that require asepsis to
perform the prescribed services: surgical service,
delivery service, nursery, and intensive care.
They shall be segregated from the public out
accessible to the outer, second, and inner zones
Service zone - a eas that provide support to
hospital activities: dietary service, housekeeping
service, maintenance and motorpool service,
t. Space
- sh~II have adequate area for the people, activity,
furniture, equipment, & utility
Area in Sou.-e Meters
Scace
Administrative S.rvice
Lobb11
I
..
Area.
Information and Reronton ~
sm,-.,,
ToiletOffa
1-67
MediC31 Records
0
,...,fl
5- i-,,_...,.
5.027.aaff
------- ------------ -~===;- =-=-: -=- -:- :- - - - -Review Module on Archftectural D eelgn
'
.-
Chapter 6: INSlTTVllONAL E3UILOINGS
Area in S uare Meters
S.02/statr
S.02/stal'f
S.0:?/st3ff
9.29
4.65
Nursing Unit
Semi-Private Room with Toilet
Patient Room
Toilet
Isolation Room w11h Toilet
Nurse Station
Treatment and Medication Area with Lavatory/Sink
Centr31 Sterilizing and Supply Room
ReceM no and Releasino Area
Wor1lArea
Sterilizing Room
Sterile Suooly Storaoe Area
flursino Service
Office of the Chief Nurse
Ancillary Service
Primary Clinical Labor3ton,
CUnical Work Area with Lavaton,/Slnk
Pathologist Area
Toilet
Radiolonv
X - Ray Room will Control Boolh. Dressing Area and
TOIiet
03rk Room
Flm File and Storaoe Area
Radiologist Area
Phannacy
S.02/st.itr
4.65
4.65
4.65
4 .65
4.65
4.65
1.67
1.40/ rson
1.67
7.43/bed
Area
0.65/person
1.67
5.02/statr
7.43/bed
7.43/bed
4 .65
1.08/stretcher
and Re1:0fds Area
~ and Treatment Area with L3VBID /Sink
C~ n A r e a
cal ancl Obdetric
I
Service
33.45
33.45
Room
Area
1rument, Supply and Stor
Area
----
Area
Room
D.651 rson
1.67
5.02/staff
7.43/bed
5.02/statr
e Area
4.65
4 .65
4.65
4 .65
1.67
5.02/statf
1.08/stretcher
3.90
Toilet
Nurse Station
Wheeled Stretcher Area
Janitor's Clo~t
S.02/st.lff
reatment Area with L3vato /Sink
Area in sauare Meters
Soace
-
-
7.43/bed
7.43/bed
1.67
'
9.29
5.02/statf
7.43/bed
5.02/sllJff
S.02/staff
4 .65
4 .65
5 .02/staff
10.00
5.02/statf
1.67
14 .00
465
4.65
5.02/statf
15 .00
-
Notes:
1. 0.6'1,,erson - Unit area per person occupyino !he space at one time
2. ~.02/stoff- Work area per stlff that includes space for one ( 1) desl! and one ( 1) chair,
space for occasional visrtor, and space for a,sle
3. 1.40/person - Unit 3rea per person occupying the space at one time
4. 7 43/bed - Clear floor area per bed that mcludes apace for one ( 1) bed, space for
occasional visnor, and space for passage ot equipment
1 otVstretcher- Clear floor area per stretcher that includes space for one (1) s11etcher
s.
2 .32
Review Module on Architectural Design
Chapter 6: INS,rrunONAL BUILDINGS
3.
Factors to Consider in the Design of a H
.
.
osp1tal or Pri
Healthcare Building
mary
• Location of the Building - healthcare b .1d.
•
•
U1 rngs should be
located .rn an accessible
area within prox,m,
. ·tyof the
.
population berng served by the building E
.
· asy access from
both pedestrians
and vehicles should be cons,.dered rn
.
.
t he d es1gn
• Circulation
- travel time and pathways ior staff, pa t·1ents
..
and v1s1tors should be designed to be reduced to the
most efficient configuration possible, while hallways
should be designed to easily allow 2-way traffic for all
end users.
• Effective Zoning
Spaces should be zoned by their services and use in
the Building
Zoning of directly related and indirectly related areas
in the hospital
Public areas in the periphery, private areas in the
central or "deeper" areas of the building
•
Privacy and Confidentiality
Healthcare occupancies must preserve an
atmosphere of privacy within the Building
Zone areas with sensitive procedures well away from
the public areas of the building
Proper areas for waiting visitors should be considered
in the design. Surgical departments, intensive care
units, and other spaces will benefit from such spaces
• Security and Supervision
Security is a major concern in hospitals both due to
theft of expensive medicines and equipment and
other criminal activities.
Expensive medicines, equipment and items should be
secured and supervised
A common problem in local hospitals are patients
who illegally leave the hospital to usually avoid
paying their medical fees; hence the need for security
and adequate monitoring of the hospital
• Efficient Staffing and Maintenance
Ensure that healthcare occupancies have an
adequate pool of professional medical staff to be
able to respond effectively to the needs of the
patients
Maintenance of the hospital is a priority for
prevention of Bacterial Infection, Equipment
breakdowns and preventable service failures such as
electrical or mechanical system failures
Preventive maintenance should be practiced in
hospitals
• Flexibility of Spaces
Due to improving technologies for treatment or
diagnosis, the hospital should be able to
accommodate future changes within its interior
Departments may have an increase in the demand of
their services over time and In effect may need to
expand their spaces.
---------------------~===~~==--:--~---,Review Module on Architectural Design
<
(
I
I
--------
rt
_,___ _ 4-
I
\
I
I
!
I
'
I
---\
Public spaces should be de .
signed to b
converted into "surge spac ., .
e able to be
es in cases of emergency.
•
Chapter 6 : INSTITUTIONAL BUILDINGS
•
Construction and design should anticipate future
expansion plans of the hospital
•
Specify anti-static materials to reduce potential sparks
and short circuits in medical equipment
Anti-static materials are necessary in equipment
intensive areas such as the radiology and surgical
departments where such equipment failures cannot
be tolerate
Expansion Spaces
Hospitals should be designed
d
future expansion under cons·1daen t~onstructed with
. .
ra 10n
Part1t1on walls and other material th
.
.
s at will make
renovation and adjusting the int .
.
enor of the hospital
possible should be considered in th d .
e es1gn
New departments and services will inevitably be
added to the hospital over the years as th
.
.
.
ey maintain
a degree of service capability to better serve the
public.
Vinyl floor sheets are anti-static 11 ,ate, lats- suitable for
specificatio ·n such areas.
• Specify materials that reduce possibility of injuries for
patients and staff.
4. Construction and Specification of Materials
Non-slippery surfaces are necessary in hospitals;
• Specify Materials that will reduce chance of bacterial
spread within the Hospital
Bacteria multiply and thrive in areas where moisture
can be trapped in small quantities. Materials such as
grout, small cracks in concrete and in certain
conditions, Paint can allow bacterial colonies to
thrive.
Anti-bacterial Paint is required in areas where sterile
conditions are needed as well as in patient sleeping
areas
Avoid material finishes that have a rough texture or
grout linings that can harbor bacterial colonies in
areas where Patients are expected to sleep or have
medical procedures
avoid slippery flooring such as smooth homogenous
tiles in areas where patients are expected to stay for
extended period of time
Include railings, handholds and other similar items in
the specifications of the hospital
s.
General Hospital Spaces
•
Administration Spaces
Spaces for the administration and executive control
of the hospital
Certain spaces should be accessible to the public
such as the cashier and the business office
Executive offices should be located in a private
location
Review Module ~n Architectural Design
e,UtL.OJNGS
-----------------------~~;!!:_!!;_!!:'.;!:'.-~-r~LJ!-rJ~O~NA~;t-,:;;;.:;;;;----
~
1
Chapter 6 , INe; '
eas:
8
and C~1e r Office
, Business Office
Admtt
~mp~ ust of
ec~ Offices
s
•
~r storage and processing of patient medical
~
be located near the public areas of the
~
ta
Department
e pat"ents are confined for medical
r observation
private rooms ( 1 Bed), semi-private
) to mu -bed patient rooms (3-6 Beds)
· i .._ ID 12 patient beds
· should service 30-35 patient beds -
be located in a quiet part of the hospital but
shotAd be ac.ce:s "ble by visito s
Sn
ist o f areas
-:. Patients rooms (1,2 or 3-6+ Beds)
. hurse station
::..
ea
and/ o medication room
•
1
Surgical Department
. 1 rocedures are done to
- Department where surg,ca p
patients
.
ent to prevent
Should have a sterile env1ronm
. · ;ts and staff
infection to the pat,en
.
f the hospital where
Should be located in a locatwn
um.
.
.
with
public traffic is at the minim
. ect commumcatJOn
Department should have d ,r
fo
the radiology and laboratOrv departments ~ I
providing data though it is best that the Surg tca
Department has satellite departments of the
mentioned spaces within the SurgicaJ DepartmenL
Sample List of Areas
o Major Operating Room · 6x6m
o Minor Operating Room
o Recovery Room
o Anesthesiologist Office and Soppty Room
°
• Emergency Department
Should be located on the pet ;pf~ of the hospital
building with access to the main hospita1 road
system and a promi nent entrance and signage
system
Department for the treatment of eme..rgency cases
such as trauma v dt:e054e afflicted patients
Adjacent to the radiology department due to
<fiagnostic need of emergency department P3tients
-:.~
'----- - - - - ----~~~=-:-===----Review Module on Architectu
r-al Design
•
Chapter- 6 : INSTITUTIONAL BUILDINGS
Work Load for the Laboratory comes from the
following:
0 In-Patient Department
0 Surgical Department
o Emergency Department
o Out-Patient Department
The 4 Main lab Services are:
o Morbid Anatomy - Analysis of Dead nssue
o Hematology - Blood Analysis
o Chemical Pathology - Analysis of Body Fluids and
Wastes
o Microbiology- Analysis and Culturing of Micro
Organisms
A ajor Source of Income of the Hos ·t I
has the highest probability of expand~~ga ·,'tsthe o _PD
.
services
among th e h osp1tal services
•
Radiology
Departm ent Responsible for the use of Both Ionizing
and Non Ionizing Medical Scanning Equipment
....
ionizing: X - Ray & er - Scan
Non-tonizing: Ultrasound & Magnetic Resonance
Imaging
Due to changing technologies and rising demand for
t his Department, expansion spaces should be
considered.
• Laboratory
.
Department Involved with the diagnosis, checking
and analysis of tissue samples for diseases and other
.
.
.d
f techniques and
ailments using a w1 e array o
equipment
Laboratories should preferably be a i f.RILE
El
•
Physical Therapy
Department responsible for the treatment of
patients who are in need of therapies to return an
impaired physical function .
Speech and/or Hearing Therapies are also located in
the Physical Therapy Area.
Along with Consultation Areas, the Therapies
provided by the Department fall int o 2 categories:
o Occupational Therapy - involves retraining for
day to dav activities for patients who have lost
fine motor skills due to injury or an operation
o Physiotherapy-the ret raining of motor skills
such as walking, and movement of the arms in
patients.
Chapter 6: IN61TfUilONAL 0UILDING5
• Ph~
Cnp rtm nt r spon ibl for th storage and
d, pensi o compounds and reagents (also known
as m d1cin )
O d d Into th in-patient and out-patient
ph r
, depend ing on which type of pat ients is
be1 se d, whethe r confined patients or walk-in
pa ients
Should have access to the Central Supply
Departme nt for the delive ry of Medicine to the
P rmacy
Security of stored medicine should be of primary
design concern fo r t he architect.
Pediatric Department
d the
- Facilit ies and offices fo r the care of children an
needs of the doctors and staff of th e department
Pediatric patients should have patient rooms
segregated from adult patients
.
This department should be designed to be child
friendly both in terms of aesthetics and
anthropometrics.
•
•
• Obstetrical De pa rtment
M edical facilit ies for the treatment and supervision of
pregnant wo men
Del.very and labor rooms are within this department
Should be in close proximity with the Surgical
Depa rtment and direct access to sterile supplies
The nursery has been gradually phased out of
Hospital design due to new guidelines of bringing the
well baby immediately to the mother in the patient
rooms. In cases of infants requiring extended medical
care and supervision, the Neonatal Intensive Care
·t
} have replaced the nursery in terms of
function.
,,,
Psychiatric Department
- Patients with mental Illnesses are treated in this
department
Department should be architecturally separated
and/or isolated from the other patients for the
benefit of the patients in the psychiatric qard
• Isolation Unit
Rooms for the isolation of infectious patients or
patients with weakened immune systems within the
hospital building
Usually singular patient rooms, but in event of an
emergency wards may be converted in Isolation
units
Attains Isolation via either differential Air Pressure
within the Room:
o Positive Pressure-Air w ithin the Isolation Unit is
of a higher pressure than the pressure in the
corridor; in effect air cannot go into the room but
air comes out of the Room. This is used for
patients that are NOT infectious but cannot be
\
I
I
I
i
\
,n
ed w ith pathogens f
a t mo ph ric ir.
om regular
'"
Chapter 6 : INSTITUTIONAL BUILDINGS
Neg t ive Pre sure A"
.
- 1r Withi
,s of a lower pressure th
n t he Isolation Unit
.
a n the p
.
co m dor; a ir goes in t o t h I
_ressure in the
ir can come out of t h Re solat1on Unit but no
e oom Th· ·
infect ious patient s to
· is 1s used for
.
.
prevent pathogens
preadmg into the atmosphe re.
• Ce n ral Sterilizatio n and Supply Department
•
~~
Tas~ed with the storage and sterilization of medical
equipment and supplies used by the various
departme n ts of the hosp ital
equipment called Autoclaves are located
in t h is department
Patient rooms and wards should have access to the
CSSD
Central Storage Department
· Department responsible for the receiving, storage
and dispensing of various materials and items
necessary for the operations of the hospital
· Located within proximity of the other service type
departments
- Should have atoading dock and receiving area
t -4,, • , Laundry
I,, SlcJ-,)ii,.t) Department for the cleaning and disinfecting of used
\ ~O '---\ linen from the hospital
. ,._0 1 ffi-' - Can either be In-house or outsourced operation
-
~'~~ ;
·e,
Surgica l Department, Obstetrical Department and
other su ch sterile departments require a direct
re lat io nship with the CSSD
•
Dietary
.
Department for the storage, preparation, cookm_g
and p lating of food for the consumption of hospital
pat ients and staff
. this department,
Due to the presence o~ foods_tu~ ~:d from the rest of
it is best to keep the Dietary ,so a
. g the
ts
from
entenn
the h ospita l to prevent Pes
• Engineering & Maintenance
Department for the maintenance of the physical
plant and equipment of the hospital
Maintenance of utilities such as electrical and
mechanical systems
Maintenance of transport (ambulance, motorpool)
and the hospital grounds (landscaping, building
Maintenance)
carpentry and machine shops for the maintenance
of furniture and equipment
Hospitals should practice Preventive Maintenance
--~-~:===:~=~~-------------------;;~~---hospital
.
The Dietary is a high fire Joa
d and fire risk area.
Mortuary
Space for the storage and post-mortem examination
of cadavers
Should be visually isolated from the public
Should have no relation with the dietary and must
be at least 25 meters away from the dietary
fc!ev1ew
;:Mo~aduu~le~o~n;;"",;A~r~c;;h;ite~c~t~u~r~a;l[D;e~s;i~0;n~I
Redundancy w ith the t ·i·
u 'ity se .
should be considered in th d ~ices of the hospit I
e es1gn
a
•
Staff Quarters
Chapter 6 : INSTITUTIONAL 6UILDING5
•
Sleeping areas for nurses and d
percentage of Staff sleepin in ;h~ors. A certain
1
" on-call"' in case of emerg g . . s areas should be
enc1es in the H
.
Usually dormitory style for .
osp1tal.
sing 1es and mar
accommodations for marr·ied
e ample
coup Ies
Rentable sleeping areas for pat· t
.
ien watchers can
also be designed for the hospital
Departments that need to be adjacent to the Outer Zone
but in some cases, does not directly interact with the
Public
Handles the Administrative Control and Record keeping
of the hospital
Exampl · Executive Offices, Medical Records
•
Integrated Zone
Color Zone - Pi
Departments that frequently interact w it the Public but
requ ire a Sterile Environment due to the type of medical
procedures being conducted in the space.
Serves as a Sterile " Outer Zone" Space; should be located
near the periphery of the hospital due to walk-in patients
but must be within the hospital building envelope to
maintain sterility.
Example: Dialysis Center, Eye Center
•
Inner Zone
Color Zone Red (Patient Area and Orange (Staff Areas)
Departments for the Care of Confined Patients
Patient Rooms and all associated spaces for its operations
are located in the inner zone
A Nursing Unit with a certain number of differing types of
Patient Rooms and a Nurse Station is called a Ward
Examples: atient Rooms, Nurse Station
6. Principles of Hosp I Zoning
• Outer Zone
Zone Colo - Yellow
The Most Public location of the Hospital
Departments that interact with the Public directly,
and thus located at the periphery of the hospital
Adjacent to the Main Entry Points of the Hospital
Generally not Sterile Environments
Examples
rgency Dept & Out-Patient Services
• ...,_oft Zone -
Medical
,.--Cotor-Btue
.
·th
ervices in coordinat1on w1
- - -- Zone the Inner Zone and the Deep Zone
V1R1:1
,
d the Inner and
ocated in between the Outer Zone an
Departments that giv
Deep Zone of the Hospitals
t · for expansion
h h'gh
paten 1a 1
1
Second Zone spaces as
• g technologies
due to rising demands an~ chang~armac.v
Example: WIIIMM~~r,,Radt0logy,
Second Zone - Administration
Zone Color - Cyan
~ e w Module on Architectural Design
______,,,.
_
Chapter 6 : IN57TiU1IONAL 8UILDINGS
•
Deep Zone
Color - Purple
All Departments that require a sterile environment are
within this zone
Should be located in quiet area of the fiospltaf,
preferably a cul-de-sac where public access can be
restricted
Should have access to the inner zone and second zone of
the hospital
Examples: I nsfve care Unit, OR/ DR
SECOND ZONE:
MEDIC.Al
►
HOSPITAL
PERIPHERY
OUTER ZONE
Service Zone
Zone Color .... Green
Any support service for the maintenance and operation
of the Hospital
Examples: Dietary, Motor Pool
•
peciaf Service Zone
Zone Color - Yellow Green
<nArjficaffy for the morgue or mortuary
~
I
I
~~ ~ ·
t- -as ~
•
..:
l
Char;,ter 7:
ASSEMBLY STRUCTURES
Review Module on Architectural Design
--
Chapter 7: ASSEM8LY S11c!UCTUR.ES
jal-alai stadiums, race tracks, a nd
A. DEFINITION
hippodromes.
Assembly refers to any structure designed to accommodate and
b. Group I: Assembly Occupant Load 1000 or More
•
Division 1-1- assembly building with a stage
and an occupant load of more than 1000. Ex:
colisea, sports complexes, theaters,
convention centers, concert halls, open
houses, convention centers.
support combined act ivities of large congregations of end-users.
It covers a wide range of sub types, denoted by the type of
activity wit hin a space.
s. OCCUPANCY CLASSIFICATIONS
1. PD 1096
a. Group H: Assembly Other Than Group I
•
ivision H-1 - any assembly building with a
aage and an occupant load less than 1000.
Ex: theaters and auditoriums, concert halls
and open houses, convention halls, little
theaters, audio-visual rooms.
•
/vision H-2 - any assembly building without
stage and an occupant loa of 300 and more.
Ex: dance ha/ls, cabarets, ballrooms, skating
rinks, cockfighting arenas.
Division H-3 - any assembly building without
a stage and having an occupant load of less
than 300. Ex: dance halls, ballrooms, skating
•
•
rinks.
Division H-4 - stadia, reviewing sta nds,
amusement park structures not i ncluded
1, 2, and 3. Ex: sports sta nds,
reviewing stands, gran d stand and bleachers,
w ithin Divisions
covered amusement parks, boxing arenas,
I
Group H & I are defined as Assembly Occupancies by the
Code. However, there are Assembly Type Bui/dings
distributed in the other Groups listed by PD 1096:
c.
roup A: Residential Dwellings
Division 1
Principal use: churches or similar places
of worhip, clubhouses and recreational
uses
Accessory use: religious use, sports club
• Division 2
Conditional use: recreational facilities,
golf driving range
•
d. 9,oup C: Education and Recreation
• Division 1
Principal use: school auditoriums
gymnasia, reviewing stands, little '
theaters, concert halls, opera houses
exhibition halls, clubhouses, churche~
and other similar place s of wors hip
I
--
•
I
n
Chapter 7: ASSEMeLY STRUCTURES
Prm ipal u
.
. amusement halls and
p rt
, billiard halls bow1,·ng II
I b
'
a eys golf
u houses, disco pads, dance and ,
musement halls, gymnasia, pelota
courts and sports complex
Accessory use: convention centers and
other related facilities, religious
structures
Group E: Business and Mercantile
•
Division E-1
e.
Accessory use: movie house/theater,
tennis, bowling and billiards, day/night
club, stadium, coliseum, gymnasium,
restaurants, convention centers and
related facilities
•
Division E-2
Principal use : day/night club, memorial
and mortuary chapels, crematories,
restaurants, fitness gyms/centers
Accessory use: funeral parlors,
mortuaries and similar structures
•
Division E-3
k recreation and
_
Accessory use: par s,
entertainment buildings
----------------
2. RA 9514
Assembly
sembly occupancies inciude, but are not limited to, all
buildings or portions of buildings used for gathering
together SO or more persons for such purposes as
deliberation, worship, entertainment, eating, drinking,
amusement, awaiting transportation, or similar uses
C. ZONING CLASSIFICATIONS
i.
ii.
Park Structures, Recreation & Entertainment
• Abbreviated as "PRE"
• Usually Low to Medium Rise Structures
• Low to Medium Intensity Recreational Functions
Cultural
• Abbreviated as "CULn
• Usually Low to Medium Rise Structures
• Structures for Cultural Activities
• Structures for Large Business Activities such as
Conventions
..... _.ule on Architectural Deeten ReVlew ,v,Oc:;;,,
o.
DEVELOPMENT CONTROLS
Chapter 7: ASSEM6LY STRUCTURES
1 Allowable Total Gross Floor A
rype of
Interior
Inside
suilding/
Lot&
lot
structure
End Lot
C
rea Table Vll.1 of PO 1096)
orner
Lot
Through
L
ot
c
ornerThrough
CornerLot
lot
abutting
3 or
I
2. Building Height Limit (Table Vll.2 of PD 1096)
•
•
more
streets,
rivers,
I
I
etc.
1
Cultural
Iw/o
BHLx60
BHLx60
BHLx65
BHLx65
BHLx65
BHLxGS
% ofTLA
% ofTLA
% ofTLA
% ofTLA
% ofTLA
%ofTLA
I
Sprinkler
Parks, Recreational & Entertainment
lS.OOm or BHL of Major Zone
Churches and other similar places of worshi p
- 1 car slot for every SO sqm of
congregation area
1 jeepney/shuttle slot for every SO sqm
of congregation area
Theaters/cinemas,
auditoria, dance halls,
b.
cabarets, ballrooms, skating rinks, cockfighti ng
a.
arenas
&
-
I
Firewalls
:w/
-~ ~
3. Parking Space Requirements
I
Cultural
Cultural
30.00m or BHL of Major Zone
BHLx70
BHLx70
BHLx70
BHLx70
BHLx70
BHLx70
% ofTLA
% ofTLA
%ofTLA
% ofTLA
% ofTLA
%ofTLA
Sprinkler
-
c.
I~rewalls
1 car slot for ~ery SO sqm of spectator
area
1 jeepney/shuttle slot for every SO sqm
of congregation area
1 bas parking stot for every 200
spectators
usement parks and entertainment complexes
. 1 car slot for every SO sqm of gross floor
area
Clubhouses,
beach houses and the like
d.
. 1 slot for ~ery 100 sqm of gross floor
L
area
----
-----
~ e W Module on Archtuct-ural Deelen
-
((
.
L.J'.
-
--
e
complexes conv .
1 c r slot for eve~ so ent,on centers
ar a
sqm of spectator
1 je~pnev/ shuttle slot fo
of spectator area
r every so sqm
1 bus parking slot for ev
spectators
ery 200
4.
Floor to lot Area Ratio (From Table VII.
a
Cu ural - 3.50
b.
PRE - 0. 50 up to 1.00
G. 2 of PD 1096)
Chapter 7: ASSEM6LY STRUCTURES
6.
RROWWidth
(meters)
30 & above
25 to 29
20 to 24
10 to 19
Below 10
E.
s.
Maximum AJJowable PSO, Maximum Allowable ISA the
MA~ ~ Minimum USA and the TOSL by Type of ~nd
Minimum Setbacks (Table Vlll.3 of PD 1096)
-
Front (meters)
Side (meters)
Rear (meters)
8
5
3
3
2
2
5
6
5
5
5
3
3
2
2
GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
1.
General
U~e Zoning per lot (Table VIII 1 of PD 1096)
Du
pprove<J
Zon g
Max.
Al owable
PSO (% of
TLA)
Max
Minimum
Allowable
ISA (paved
open
USA
TOSL (ISA
+USA)
PARAMETERS
Minimum Occupant Load
spaces)
(unpaved
open
spaces)
20
20
40
20
10
30
Recreational
Conference Rms,
Exhibit
Rms,Gymnasia
Drinking
Establishments
Auditoriums,
Theaters,
Churches,
Reviewing stands,
Dance floors,
SJ)aces
Stadia
C ural w/ o
60
frewall
, Cu ural w/
· firewall
70
I
-
Parts& Open
20
30
so
80
PD 1096
Bulldlng Code
RA9514
Fire Code
Unit Area per
Occupant (sqm)
Unit Area per
Occupant (sqm)
1.4
1.4
1.4
0.65
1.4
0.65
(0.28 for standing
room or waiting
space)
-
PARAMETERS
PD1096 Bulldin2 Code_
,
RA9514
Fire Code
Chapter 7: A55EM6LY STRUCTURES
-
PARAMETERS
Distance to Exits
occupants
1
11-499
occupants
2
500-999
occupants
Width of Exit
2
46 meters (w/o
sprinkler system)
60 meters (w/
sprinkler system)
61 meters (w/
sprinkler system)
Doors
700mm
710mm
Maximum Width
1.2 meters
1.22 meters
4
2 meters
2 meters
4
shall not be less
minimum 915 mm
Minimum Height
Threshold (max.
height)
50mm
13mm
1.1 meters
1.12 meters
Corridors
occupant load
Minimum Width
Dead End (Max.
Distance)
divided by 165
Arrangement of Exits
not less than 1/5
not less than 1/2
of perimeter
maximum
diagonal
of the area
1.12 meters for
occupant load <
2,000
1.42 rrreters for
occupant load >=
2,000
Riser
200 mm (max)
180 mm (max)
Tread
Max. vertical
distance bet.
250 mm (min)
3.6 meters
280 mm (min)
if protected by
automatic
sprinkler system)
the others
shall be available
at least 2 exits
shall comply min.
distance
requirement
6 meters
0.75 m for
occupant load less
than 10
0.9 m for occupant
load of 50 or less
1----------1
1.1 m for occupant
load more than 50
Minimum Width of
Stairways
(not less than 1/3
If one is blocked,
6 meters
Stairways & Ramp
length of the area
3 or more exits
45 meters (w/o
sprinkler system)
Minimum Width
than total
2 exits
RA9514
Are Code
3
3
1,000 or more
occupants
2
PD1096
BulldlntrCode
Landings
3.66 meters
-
I pAR,\MITTRS
PD 1096 BulldiflJt Code
Handrails
-
Height above
tread/ ramp
..----
I Ra
stairways with
more than 3
meters of width
2 meters
ps
I
1.12 meters
N/A
1 : 12
N/A
0.76 meter
Max. cross slope
N/A
1 : 48
Width
0.8 meter if serving
0. 76 meter for
less than 60
seats
Aisle
only one side
1 meter
if serving
both sides
1.1 meters for side
I
I
I
aisles
PARAMETERS
Aisle Width
(cont.)
PD 1096
Building Code
RA 9514
Fire Code
(width increased by 30
mm w/ every meter in
length towards the exit)
(width
increased by
25 mm w/
every meter in
length towards
the exit)
45 meters
46 meters
7
7
14
14
sum of widest
aisle+ 50%
ofremaining
aisles it serves
Max.
distance to
exit
Max. no. of
seats bet
wall & aisle
Max. no. of
seats bet
aisles
2 meters
Max. slope
I AJsk.s
:
required for
stairways with
more than 2.23
meters of width
1.1 meters
! s1 gle run
-
Wall
Mrn. W idth
ax. rise for a
-
Chapter 7: ASSEMBLY STRUCTURES
mm
38 mm from required for
inimum Headroom
-
7Go mm-ass
Min. clearance
Intermed iate
handrails
I
RA 9514
Fire Code
800 mm - 900 mm
I
-
-
Cross Aisles
sum of widest aisle + 50%
of remaning aisles it
serves
Aisle Dead
Ends
(maximum
distance)
Maximum
Aisle Slope
0.912 m for
greater than 60
sides (1 side)
6 meters
1:8
6 meters
12.5%
1.22 m for
greater than 60
seats (2 sides)
I
------ ----------
-
Review Module on Architectural Design
-
~
Y
Chapter 7: AS SEME!,L
,.~ T
s,,U
I
5p.1ctfl8 of
"M,~1mum
dt!.ir space
I
I
'
Buildln« Code
840 mm (back to back)
mm for 18 or less
seats
stat5
t,ttwttn
PO 1096
RA 9S14
Fire Code
830 mm (back
to back)
N/A
Max. no. of seats between
aisles
.
nds w/ or w/out
15 for open air s~~ in buildings w/out
backrests and w it
backrests;
k sts in b~ildlnlS
6 for seats w/ bac re
shall be provided in all stands
Aisles requ ired
EXCEPTwh en ALL ff· conditions exist:
-seats are without backrests
-row riser does not exceed 300mm
-no. of rows does not exceed 11
-top seating board is not over 3 meters
above grade
-first seating board is not more than
500 mm above grade
soo mm for 19-35 seats
525 mm for 36-45 seats
550 mm for 46 or more
seat s
- n width
of
seat/seating
space
-
450mm
600 mm (seat
w/o dividing
arms)
z.
Requirefflfflts for Reviewing Stands, Grandstands, and
Sle.chen (PO 1096)
i Httg t of Stands
2. 7 meters or 11 rows for stands
made of combusible framing
I
I ~ 11. we load
500 kg per square meter
~
sw~force
35 kg per linear meter
.Pwllendiculat sway force
15 kg per linear meter
Row spacing
,__
l.!aq ·
~ between rows
th of seat
w~
Stairs required
Dead End
Stairs maximum rise
1.1 meters
200mm
Stairs minimum run
280mm
Ramp Slope
1:8
Handrails required
Guardrails required
ramps exceeding 1:10 slope
where top of seat plank is more than
1.2 meters above grade & at front of
stands elevated more than 600 mm
above grade
400mm
.
'
Railing height
300mm
when an aisle is elevated more than
f .. 200 mm above w ade
maximum of 16 rows
Min. aisle width
600 mm without backrests
750 mm w ith backrests
850 mm for chair seating
M.i. Space between the back
cf seats
~
s-rRuci-u~s-
....
1.1 meters
(0.9 meter for guardrails in front of the
grandstand)
450 mm - 480 mm
Review Module on Architectural Design
above the 3 rd
.
row orwhe
plank is more than 60
re the seating
grade
O mm above
foot boards
chairs shall be secured EXCEPT
when less than 25 ch .
airs are used
upon a single raised platform
when more than 500 loose chairs
are used, chairs shall be fastened
together in groups of not less than 3
securing of Cha irs
3. Plumbing Code of the Philippines
a . Assembly places - theaters, auditoriums, convention
halls, etc. for employee use
Water Closets
Urinals
Lavatories
Male
Female
1: 1-15
1: 1-15
3: 16-35
4: 36-55
2: 16-35
3: 36-55
Over 55, add 1 fixture
0: 1-9
1: 10-50
Add 1 fixture for
each additional
50 males
Chapter 7: ASSEMBLY STRUCTURES
b. Assembly places - theaters, auditoriums, convention
halls, etc for public use
Water Closets
Urinals
Lavatories
Male
,
Female
1: 1-100
Male
Female
1: 1-100 3: 1-50
2: 101-200
1: 1-200 1: 1-200
2: 1014: 51-100
3: 201-400
2: 2012: 201-400
200
8: 101-200 4: 401-600
400
3: 401-750
3: 20111: 201Add 1
3: 401400
400
fixture for
750
Over 400, add 1
each
Over 750, add 1
fixture for each
additional
fixture for each
additional 500 males 50 males
additional 500
persons
and 2 for each 300
females
1 per 40
c
Worship Places
Water Closets
Male
1 per 150
for each additional 40
Female
1 per 75
Urinals
Lavat ories
1 pe r 150
1 per 2
wat er
closets
persons
---------------
~ew
M GI "'on Archtt.ect-ural Deelgn o u
Chapter 7: ASSEM0Ly S1RUC1URES
~
F.
ERFORMIHG ARTS THEATERS
P A Building, part of a building, or an outdoor area for
•
housing dramatic presentations, stage entertainment, or
motjon-picture shows.
1.
Assessing Demands
Potential Audiences - The population h Id
characteristics of the surrounding area s o~ I
allow the architect to determine the potentra
target audiences of the space. This depends on
what exact assembly type the space is, whether
for entertainment, worship or exhibitions
i. An important element of a feasibility study is the
assessment of demand for performing arts within
the community that the facility is proposed to
serve. The aim is to establish whether there are
audiences for the proposed program of use, and to
define catchments area from which audiences are
to be drawn
ii. Assessment of the Area under consideration
includes studies of:
•
•
Population Characteristics - The location of the
building should consider the type of viewing
public that can possibly access the building so
as to determine the profitability of the space
Transportation Characteristics - Just as the
need to determine the population around the
proposed assembly space is paramount,
physical access to the site should also be
considered. Public Transport and personal
vehicles should have ready access to the site
•
2.
Local Cultural Traditions - Assembly Structures,
due to the cost and effort in construction and
design, are usually a cultural presentation of
the city or country where it is located in, and as
such should reflect the cultural sensibilities of
the location.
Seating capacity
a. The Maximum Capacity of an Auditorium
depends on the format selected, and on
aural and visual limitations set by the type
of production.
b. Other factors include Levels, Sight lines,
Acoustics, Circulations, Seating Density,
Size and Shape of Platform / Stage
--------------------;;.:;:~~~~~~~~ew Module on Architectural Design
3.
Size of Auditorium
a . An Area of at I
easto s sq
to be used for sittin .
m Per spectator Is
space between spe gt spectators. Too much
.
c ators ere t
an d visual Voids in the au . a es acoustic
is also not desired . d .d1ence area Which
communal interact1·1no :s1gln. A feeling of
n 1s a sop f
.
an auditorium to
re erred in
promote a b tt
.
experience
e er social
b.
Chapter 7 : ASSEMBLY STRUCTURES
4•
Volume of Room
- Obtained on the basis of acoustic
requirements:
i.
Play Houses approx. 4-5 cu.m per
spectator as the performances requ ire a
more Intimate audience actor
interaction, with vocal performances a
larger consideration than pure musical
performances.
Opera appro. 6-8 cu.m per spectator as
Operatic Performances utilizes more
musical instruments.than a typical
playhouse, and as such the more air
volume to allow acoustic reverberation is
desired.
s.
Proportions of Auditorium
a. Viewing Angle is obtained from the
spectator's psychological perception, as
well as the requirement for a good view
from all seats
i. Good View without Head movement,
but slight eye movement of about 30
Degrees
Number derived from a seat w·dth
•
1
x row
spacing of at least 0.45 sqm per seat.
t - - i: tO - - t
T
lSO
ii. Good View with slight head movement
and sli£ht eye movement of about 60
Degrees
h. ct'5 Data ~ ed. Oxford:
Source: Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Arc ,te
Blackwell Sdence Ltd, 2000.
----
·
iii. Maxi mum Perception angle w ithout
head movement is about 110 Degrees,
~ew Module on Archtt.e~ral De9ien
-
in this field everyth·
place " b etween theing Which takes
Chapter 7 : ASSEM6LY STRUCTURES
eyes" is perceived corners of the
iv.
ll. Playhouse - 24m - Maximum Distance
for Facial Expression
With full head and
iii. Opera - 32m - Important Movements
visible
movement
shoulder
, a percept"
Degrees is possible ion field of 360
-
[ II. -
lo11ne
I
":idth of aud t
I
i onum
ast row
_8 I
8 IC
proscenium width ~
BCDE - acting area of stage
proscenium
w idth
:I
-
111
A
1.
ast
row
2.
middle
row
3.
first
row
I
.
I O -hne (proscen ium line)
proscenium w idth
at 24m ,. 13m
at 32m -. 17 m
f
A.
0
:'I --::,::·:.::_--7
i+
30
apron stage
.account is tctken of the
fact that the hatched
section cannot be seen
by the side seats
l._
I ---
.i;. I
P • point to
determine
w idth of
aud1to11um
I
width of apron stage •-
-·-,
l
1
1 • proscenium i
width
depth o f Slage ac ting area
Auditorium width
I
2,(32) m
auditorium --- - - --- --
I
stage
1---·--·
·
-I
Source: Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Data. t" ed. Oxford:
Blackwell Science Ltd, 2000.
Pro.,ortiona of the traditional auditorium Cview)
c.
Elevation of Seating/Sight Line
Gradient in the auditorium is obtained from the lines
of vision of the audience. To compute for the riser
b.
Proportions of the Classical Auditorium
i. Maximum Distance of Last Row from
the Proscenium Line
height/elevation use the formula:
~eW Moaule on Archl'Uct.ur•I D.,eign
N = (R + C) x (D + T} - R
D
Chapter 7: AS5EM5LY 5i'RUC-nJRE5
The offMttlng of Neta In a row Is -lllieved ._. di,,_...t w t
Wicttllla (O.&o-o.&3-0.M)
□ 11111111111111
Cl I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
Where:
N = the riser height
01111111111111111
D = the horizontal distance from th
of focus
e eye to the point
R = the vertical height to the point of focus
T = the seating row depth
~•1111111111)
Ill I II l i i l lU
feeling of integrat,on (mutual percept,on•
C = 120 mm or 150 mm for persons with hats
The height from the floor to a sittin
level
rson's eye
1.1 mela's. It is also the maximum height of
the stage so that the audience would be able to see
the performance and not the stage itself. The
minimum height of the stage should
above the floor level.
•: ;:::::::~::t
,
C Value
........ _____ _
f\J = (R + C) x (D + T) - R
0
Stages and Secondary Areas
Source: Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Data. ~ ed. Oxford:
Blackwell Science Ltd, 2000.
TO LOADING
TO DRESSING
& STORAGE
ROOII
TO LOBBY
----------------------------------------------
...,.,,_ Module on Architeci>Ur•I Deel<,n . . . . .
L
•
Chapter- 7 : ASSEM6L Y STRUCTURES
- - ..
--
- -
f :,,.._ ·
I
...! :
.
ii.
p
RE
Cl
iii.
-.
iv.
V.
6.
Types of Performing Arts Theaters & Other Viewing
Spilces
i.
vi.
rust Stage - Stage designed to have
audience seating on three sides of the
performance area.
Theater in the Round/ Arena - An Arena or
Theater in the Round designed to have
audience seating on all sides of the
performance area.
Concert Hall/ Conservatory - Designed for
Classic Musical Performances. Reserved for
Performances involving Orchestras, Pianists,
Violinists and similar Arts. Audiences seated
around the Performance as focus leans on
the auditory performance
Coliseum/ Arena - Indoor or Outdoor Space
designed for a variety of activit ies from
Sporting Events, Gatherings and
Entertainment Activities.
Grand Stand/ Bleachers/ Stadia - Very
Similar to a Coliseum except it is designed to
hold a larger number of end-users and it is
designed for Open Air Events.
AUmro,r ium / P;cture Frame/ Proscenium Characterized by a clear separation between
audience and the stage. The Audience can
"' view
. . the .-a•V'I"-----•nee from one s@
on,,.
,, e;
he nce the moniker of a "Picture Frame
Theater
J
VIE THEATERS
A movie theat r, also called a 1
.
.
c nema, Is a ve
, bu• mg, for viewing motion Picture fil
I
nue, usually
m. t should b
rovide good visual experience to the v·
e able to
iewers with
.
of the film 's projected film.
out distortion
Chapter 7 : ASSEM0LY STRUCTURES
-
I
a. Screen and Seat ing
•
- --- ~
Th
ter of the screen should b
.
f
e w1thi
rom the eye level of the person sittin
.
row. The bottom of th
g at the first
e screen should be
mounted at the eye level of the viewer.
-- --·· - -
-
-~...
z
~
~
~
~
ZO/t/
-
,..
Source: Fajardo, Max. Planning and Designers Handbook.
r'1 ed. Quezon City: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
•
Balcony seating at premier viewing may be
provided if a larger number of seats is desired
Width of seat is from 500 to S50 mm and the ·
spacing of rows should be fro 800 to 850 mm.
•
~ first row of seats
Source: Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Data. 3'd ed. Oxford:
Blackwell Science Ltd, 2000.
•
~
SEATING
b,
Maximum Width of Screen
• 11 meters for standard 3S mm film
•
•
14 meters for cinemascope 35 mm film
20 meters for 70 mm film
The ,_,.._Mt"seat from the screen should not
exceed twice the width of the screen itself a~\ 3
the width of audience area should not excee ·
times the width of the screen
Review Module on Architectural Deelgn
50to 55
Chapter 7 : ASSEM5LY SiRUCTURES
SEATING DIMEN8IONS
c.
Source: Fajardo, Max• Plannmg
.
and Designers Handbook. 2nd
ed. Quezon City: 5138
Merchandising, 1996.
Aspect Ratio - defines the proportion of the width and
height of the screen. The aspect ratio varies according to
the type of film used. Current video standards are 4:3 for
normai screen a 16:9 for wide screen.
___....... 150 - -- 150
105
Door
d. Projection Room
•
The projected angle from the horizontal line of
the projector lens should be maximum of 10• to
avoid distortion of the image
•
Minimum area of room with one projector
machine is 5 sqm. An additional 2.5 sqm should
be provided for each additional projector.
15
.;
--tf50
-m
LJ
120
10
120
Film ..,-·
Rewiott
table
Proiectiol'I table
75
t
~
u
IJ
Door
a:
PROJECTION ROOM
Source: Fajardo, Max. Planning and Designers Handbook.
~ ed. Quezon City: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
330
C£S OF WORSHIP
Chapter 7: ASSEMBLY S'T'RUCT"URES
vestry
p riests·
s e ats h i gh altar
nsty
r---,,-,._...,__ communion
choir
rail
side altar
sacr isty
hall for
...
entrance
state
chairs
cro ss ing
0
' altar
transept
Q
to7
rn-;.ve
congregation
L
Q,)
'.>
"'
C
organ and
c hoi r
~alleries
bdpt1stry
4 north
.J
sarcophagus
Layout of the Berlin Dom
(Protestant cathedral)
designed by Schinkel
west
to wers
a. Size of the church
As a rule of thumb, provide'"J.6 sqm of area pe
t
seat. This would already include space for altar, platform,
sacristy, vesting room, and vestibule. If only seating area
Layout of typical
Roman Catholic church
Sourte:Neufert, Emst and Peter. Architecrs Doto. 3
/JlocJcwe11 Science Ltd, 2000.
rd
is considered including the aisles 2.4 sqm per person is
sufficient
d
ed. Ox/Of :
~view Module on Architectural Design
b. Seating A rea
The seating capacity f h
o c Urch pe
.
width o f 4 50 mm per person A
w s is based on a
. verage back t 0
dimension o f the pews is 900
.
back
mm. It rs rec
provide a she lf at the back o f ea h
o rnrnended to
c Pew for pr
or hymnals.
ayer books
C hapter- 7 : ASSEM 8LY STRUCTURES
c.
Aisles
The nave or the central aisle should have a
minimum Width of 1.5 meters white side aisles should
have a minimum Width of 1.1 meters.
d. Altar
a
- -;
90
The size of the altar varies from 1.2 meters to 2.4
meters long by 0.7 to 1.2 meters wide. The attar should
0.951n high and free-standing. During the mass
celebration, the priest stands behind the altar facing the
people. The top of the altar should be in natural stone
finish. Relics of saints may be set into the altar or sunk
,. .,.
into the ground where it ls located. It may be elevat~
Pew in Catholic
Church
using a 100-150 mm hagh p~tform.
hat hook
a
85
f
Pew in Protestant
Church
,F-ert Ernst and Peter.
Source: Neu1• ,
Architect's Doto. ~ ed. Orford:
Blackwell Science Ltd, 1000.
~IOe-'en
~ Moaut.!t on Arc
e. Lectern or pu pit
Chapter 7: ASSEM6LY STRUCTURES
A lectern is a table . h
W1t sloped
Bible is placed. The width
.
surface Wh
. .
varies frorn O
ere the
and the m m1mum depth should
.6 to 0 .9 meter
be 0.4 meter.
•
•
•
•
g.
In front of the altar - the choir is segregated but part
of the congregation
At th e back of the pews or choir loft
At th e s,"d e of the altar or within an alcove
Within the pews - the choir is not segregated from
the congregation
Ve sting room or Sacristy
The sacristy is a room used is where the celebrant
prepares for the celebration and where the robes and
..
t
~
.
0
~
•
s,oe
•
Le CTe!~N
rd
Source: Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Data. 3 ed. Oxford:
Blockwe/1 Science Ltd, 2000.
f.
Other space requirements for Catholic church
•
...
,
"llONT
AD JU eT""e,t..e
h.
..
.. ...
~r
.
vessels are kept. It should be located near the altar and
should be ovideo-w.t
toilet.
Choir area
The choir may be located in one of the following P1aces:
n be
• Behind altar_ the choir is less visib Ie b u t ca
heard however the members of the choir cannot
,
h
regation
participate properly in t e cong
Tabernacle - a place where the Blessed Sacrament is
kept marked by a sanctuary lamp
Baptistery - a place where baptism ceremony Is
done. A baptistery may be located in a side chapel or
a baptismal font may just be provided in the nave of
the church
Confessional - a booth where the Sacrament of
Reconciliation takes place. The space between the
penitent and the priesl is usually separated by a
screen to preserve anonymity. The confessional
booth is usually placed next to the choir or in the side
aisles.
2. Mosque
A mosque is a Muslim build ing or place of public
worship. It is a house of prayer, a cultural center, a place
for social gatherings, a courthouse, a school and a
---~~=~~~=~~---------------------~;;:~Mj;;:i,;~~te~o;;;;n~A;;;rc~h;;;;rte;;.c-C;;u~n1;:;jl~D;;;e;e~lg;n;;-fc!evieW o~u
'-----.
university. Traditiona lly
, men and
in the prayer hall of t he 111
Wornen are
a *masJld" w hile a la
o sque. A srna11 n,
segregated
rge mosque is call d ~sque is called
e a Jarnih."
Chapter- 7 : A SSEM6L Y S TRUCTURES
a. Sahn
Sahn is the central courtyard of the ffl09QUe
.6.
Mecca
T
ka'bah
--~. . . ii
/
Which is usually of the same size as the p rayer hall. It
I
'-
/
(
\
' -t - /
,..____
'
can be used as an extension o f the prayer h all d uring
holy days. One distinctive feature of the sahn is a
room
'I
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
$
0
0
0
0
0
>
cu
r i tual
ablutions I
and racks should also be present for the storage of
Prayer haR OIi MIUSIIIWI
The prayer hall rs usually rectangular or square rn
~
-
(.)
fl)
E
0
C 0
(V ,._
11--.--.t
With ablution before enter,ng the prayer hall. Shelves
shoes and coats which are prohibited Inside the
prayer hall.
0
0
0
Entrance Area
rooms. Muslims are required to cleanse themselves
0
0
b.
The entrance must have ablution or shower
I
---➔~--J
0
decorative f ountain which is used fonttuaf ablution.
Prayer
r itual
ablutions
shape usually with a central dome and faces Mecca,
the direction in which people pray. A space
sqm should be provided per person. There are no
chairs or pews in the prayer hall so ~ to allow a large
number of worshrppers to ltne the room.
- .....~ main entrance
·t
Source: Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Arch I e
Blackwell Science Ltd, 2000.
1>.8S
crs Doto· f' ed. oxford:
RA,vieW Modu&e on Arc hft4'ct-uMIII De:e4gn
Chapter 7 : ASSEM6LY STRUCTURES
g.
Minaret
A minaret is a tower attached to a mosque having
stairs leading up to one or more projecting balconies
from which the muezzin calls the Muslim people to
prayer. Small mosques rarely have a minaret. Nowadays,
"4
the call to prayer is relayed by loudspeakers in some
countries
p.opee at prayer
Source: Neufert, Emst and Peter. Architect's Data. 3rd ed. Oxford:
BJockwell Science Ltd, 2000.
Qibla or Kit> ~
ft is the wall in the mosque in which the mihrab is set,
oriented towards Mecca.
e. Mihrab
It is a niche or decorative panel in a mosque
designating the qibla.
f.
Mimbar or Minbar
Ir
A mimbar or minbar is a pulpit in a mosque, reca ;g
. h Muhammad addresse
the three steps from w h ic
d r
h ncayer lea er o
his followers. This is used by t e l'l:
Imam In the Friday prayers.
'-----------------
Deeign ~ Module on ArchiUC-t.Ur-al
.
J
Chapter 8:
TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES
--------------IReviW'e~wM~odu~le
on~Ar~chlte~ctu~ral~Dee~ign.
~
--- ,._
Chapter 8: TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES
orr mo
Transportation facilities
re structure
odate publte and Private v h.
s used to
e 1c 1es Thi h
1 g buildings, terminals and .
·
s c apter Will focus
.
,
a irports wh
......:arunr.:actun
or is done.
ere no repair or
1. ClASSJACATIONS
Pa I g tld i !8'5, public transport terminal
.
s, and airport
er
roup
occupancy
o
r
,.
.
s are
G
dassi ea
E
8 usmess and Mercantile•
. .
0 M Ston E-1
·
•
Co
mercial garages and parking b .1d.
cars, tractors, etc.
one to three storey shopping centers, small offices or
mixed use/occupancy buildings and the like.
•
2.
.
u1 mgs, dtSplay for
Bus a d r a i tway depots, termin als, and offices
•
•
rsports a d he li port facilities
ot er types of tran sportation complexes
Divisio n E-2
uto repa·r, t ire , vulca nizing shops and carwash with
m 100 square meters service area
Oivtsion E-3
· craft hangars where no work is done except
6.Change of parts and mai~enance
Commercial parking lots and garages (in medium to
rise buildi ngs)
ClMSIRCATIONS
Diwislon E-1
•
3.
UTS (Utilities, Transportation, and Services)
A range of occupancies, characterized mainly as a
low-rise or medium-rise building/structure for low to
high intensity community support functions, e.g.
terminals/ intermodals/ multi-medals and depots
Division E-2
•
C-2 (Commercial Two or Medium Commercial)
A municipal or city level of commercial use or
occupancy, characterized mainly as a medium-rise
building/structure for medium to high intensity
commercial/trade, service and business activities ,
e.g. three to five storey shopping centers, medium to
large office or mixed use/occupancy
buildings/structures and the like
Division E-3
• C-3 (Commercial Three or Metropolitan Commerci al)
Means a metropolitan level of commercial
use/occupancy, characterized mainly as a mediumrise to high-rise building/structure for h igh to very
high intensity commercial/trade, service and business
activities, e.g. large to very large shopping malls, very
large office or mixed-use/occupancy buildings and
the fike.
C-1 Com.me cial One or Light eomme<c.ial)
.
A neig bothood or community level of commerc:~I
use o occupancy ch aracterized mainly as a loW-nse
buifidinrzJstn,JCWre fOf low intensity
. _.
·
nd business actJVitte5, e .g.
--..____:r~~~~:=oa~-~l/~tr=ade~~,~servtee:::_:a:::=~----------;~~~-;;:~Mo~~dl~u~le~on~Ar~c~h~iu;:;;~ctu;:;ra~ID~eet.;n~·
g;:
~
ANSPOR"fA -rtON FACILl-r1E5
~
Chapter 8: ,
o
nd 1
Provide 1 loading slot for articulated truck a
f
2
loading slot for a standard truck for every 5,000 m o
O(V[l0PM£NT CONT1'0lS
l. G ~
Refer o Oevek>p~nt Controls in Chapter 3: Mercantile
h tabhsh
z.
p ~ Requirements
•
gross floor area
nts,
Terminals. I er-modals or Multi-modals, Depots and the
E. GENERAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.
Refer to Development Controls in Chapter 3: Mercantile
Establishments.
car slot for ~ 500 m 2 of gross floor area
1 off-RROW passenger loading space that can be
accommodate 2 queued jeepney/shuttle slots or 2
hichever is applicabl"
Transit S ations and the like
1 o ff-RROW passenger loading space that can be
accommodate queued jeepney/shuttle slots or 3
bus slots w hichever is applicable
•
•
F.
PARKING STRUCTURES
1. Size of Parkin& Area
Parking lots, exclusive of drives for entering them, require
32.50 square meters per car as a rough/preliminary figure .
Factors to consider in determining the final size of the parking
lot are the width of the available space and the desired angle
of parking.
Aircraft hangars, open parking carports and garages,
etc.
1 car slot for f!+lf!ry 1,000 m 2 of gross floor area
1 bus slot for every 100 workers
If workers exceed 200, provide 1 off-RROW passenger
loading space that can accommodate 2 queued
jeepney/shuttle slots
•
2.
Parking Slots
Minimum Parking Slot Dimensions
Car (perpendicular/diagonal)
2 .50 x 5.00 meters
Car (parallel)
2.15 x 6 .00 meters
Car (for handicapped)
3.70 x 5.00 meters
Repair garages and aircraft repair hangars
1 car slot for every 1,000 m2of gross floor area
1 bus slot for every 100 workers
•de 1 off-RROW passenger
If workers exceed 200, prov•
d
loading space that can accommodate 2 queue
jeepney/shuttle slots
Review Module on Architectural Deelgn
-
Chapter 8 : TRANSPORTATION FACIL\TIES
[I I l l }~Ll
~
4 SO
is
2S±
\
leny1h
I
• 4. 50,n
Wtdlh
w • 180 111
Ir ont Ove, hang O,
rea, Ove, hang 0 , • 0.8Sn
- 1 35m
w heel base
w - 2 30m
height
H
16Sm
w e,ght
2 Ot · 201i.
•
•
Turning radius of private vehicles = 5 to 6 meters
*5.8 meters according to Figure V/11.G. 7 of PD
1096
A single stripe, 100 to 150 mm wide, may be used to mark the
parking stalls. End stalls should be about 0.30 m wider than
usual, especially if bounded by a building wall or other
\
\
/_j
PARALLEL PARKING
{O" ANGLE PARKING)
soo
Source: Neufert, Emst and Peter. Architect's Data. 3rd ed
axford: Blackwell Science Ltd, 2000.
·
\
•
Diagonal parking
may either be 30•, 45", or 60• angle to the driveway.
This layout provides easy entry to and exit from the
park\ng slot, reduces driveway width but requires
more total space
obstructions. A 150 mm high parking barrier or wheel stop
may be placed 0.60 meter from the parking slot rear
boundary. Minimum vertical clearance for covered and multi-
-
.J
level car park buildings shall be 2.10 meters.
2. Parking Layout and Driveways
•
Parallel parking
Th.
o· angle parking or parallel to the drivew~Y· is
spaces but gives
layout is suitable for narrow
.
t
d ·t f om the parking s1o .
DIAGONAL PARKING
l3Cr ANGLE PARKING)
-----------~d:iffi::•c~u:lty:i:n~e:n:t~ry~to~a~n~e~x~•_r_____________lRev\~~e:w~M~od~u~\e~o~n~A~r~c;h~\-tect~~u:r~a~\~D;e;e;\~e;n~I
--
Chapter 8 : ~NSPOR1A ,ION FACILltlE5
•
Perpendicular parking
90• angle parking or perpen dicu lar to the driveway.
and exit from the
Sharp turn is needed for entry t o
.
parking slot. This layout is used frequently because ,t
provides th best economy In terms of space.
2500
DIAGONAL PARKING
(U- ANGLE PARKING)
PERPENDICULAR PARKING
(90• ANGLE PARKING)
<--1
3. Vehicular Ramps
a.
Ramp slope must not exceed 20% or 1·5.
b. For slopes greater than 10% or 1:10, a transition of at
least 2.4 meters is required at each end o1 t he ramp at
one half the slope of the ramp. The reason for provtd,ng
DIAGONAL PARKING
(60• ANGLE PARKING)
r-
this transition Is to not go bevond the ma,timum ramp
O'ller an le of 10 deg
rees. The ramp bre
easure of ab Tty
akover angle
11
of to b
it out scraping.
reak over a
C
Chapter 8: TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES
d. The following are the different ramp systems that may be
utilized in a multi-level car park building:
• Straight Ramp System
• A straight ramp system usually has #stacked"
ramp over another f construction economy and
traffic circulation uniformity. The stacking of
ramps creates a "ramp-well"
- The shape of the car park building is usually
rectangular with the ramp well located along the
longer side dimension. This makes the straight
ramp system advantageous in relatively narrow
p roach angle is 14 d
a gle at th
.
. ~grees While the
e rear ts hmited to 9 d
egrees.
L:-J~
.\NGU OF OEP~e
CJC::S
IUffdings.
~ ~ ANCJLE fQA SLQPE'GRUTER THAN 10 DEGREES
2400 MM 'fRANSITION /
UM R,AMP SLOPE• 20'A
'
0
/ 112 ~ R,UIP SloPE
FOlt SLOP£ OVER 1ft. ~
LEAST 2A METERS AT
.
nd oesigners Hon
0
ce: Fajardo, Max. Plonm~~
zon Oty: 5138 M erchondismg, 1996·
Oxford: Blackwell Science Ltd, 2000.
TRANSlflON or, AT
:.C, Of THE RAMP
dt,ook.
r
full ramp•
Source: Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Data. j'1 ed.
/
OP£
Muhi-storey structure with
ed.
-
------==~
. w Moc:iu1., on Archtuctural Deelgn
~v,e
...
Chapter-8: TRANSPORTATION FACILmES
•
em
em• invented by
u
ed
sect
•
Sloping Floor System
In this system, the entire car park structure is
composed of sloping levels. It contains two
adjacent parking modules tilted in opposite
directions, with cross-aisles at each end so that
vehicles traveling the length of both aisles make a
turn to move up or down one complete parking
level. Cross-aisles may be sloped or level. Floor
slope should range between 3-5 %}
Applicable to use in limited spaces since there is
no additional areas required fo r ramps; not
recommended for disabled parking slots
.
ns. Wrth floor levels
s cli8&ered
vertically by one half
those I ad"
~IO
S
Ja~ent sections providing.
ra
·
"Pi>bcalt>le
ps sloped in alternate
connect t e holf stones.
O
small, ig -cost sites where
use of space ust be achieved. It is
e'ficien in e rms of floor space per vehicle
pa
slo b
frequ e nt conflicts may arise
between the circulating traffic and t he ve hicles.
(g)
Full ramps. no lou of space
Haff-storey ramp car-park
(D"Hunty system)
~
: ~ufert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Dato. :id ed.
°"ford: Blackwell Science Ltd, 2000.
,I
.,
Review Module on Architectural Design
r
•
Helie tty Curv d
- T
amp System
e ram ps us d in th'
is svstem r
.
t h n st raig ht ram b
e qu,re more sp
ps ut off b
ace
oper t io n The
er etter traffic
•
V are often located .
rectangular structu
in corners of
res to minirni fl
or located outsid e t h e t
ze oor-space loss
s ructure Th
re latively expensiv d .
.
e system has a
e es1gn Which .
visib ility to the d .
gives poor
rivers.
Chapter 8: TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES
D - 610to 6;(lO
Source: Fajardo, Mox.
Planning and Designers
Handbook. z>d ed. Quezon
City: 5138 Merchandising,
1996.
O • 610 to 600 MAX GRADE - 12%
@
Spiral ramp car-park
-' · 30to60
The radius of the edge of the inner lane shall be
8-60
m ore than 5 meters. Maximum slope shall be
C- 75
12%.
RADIUS • 16.60 tx> l i.00 m.
SECnoN X· X
Source: Neufert, Emst and Peter. Architect's Data. jd ed.
Oxford: Bloc~
// Science Ltd, 2000.
FIGURE 4-17 CIRCULAR RAMP
·'
There are two
system:
o
Pes of her
ically curved ramp
Single Helix Systern
The helix rarnp can b
.
.
e a single rf
permits vehicles t
su ace that
o travel on
helical path betw
a continuous
een parking I
I
two way traffic is handled on ev_e s. When
the outer lane is used f
a single helix,
.
.
or up movements
smce ,t has a larger curvat ure and lower
Chapter 8 : TRANSPORTATION FACILl1"1E5
o
Double Helix System
Uses two helical path surfaces that are
sloped in opposite directions. The two
sloping helical surfaces may be separated
or interwoven. Vehicle movements for
both up and down directions are made in
the same direction of rotation.
grade. Entrance and exit Poms
. t can be
I ocated on the sa rne s,•d e or opposite sides
for the ramp coil. Ramp access points on
different levels are located directly above
each other.
Double spiral ramp•.
auperimposed up and down
lanes
-:~ <·>::_::::•::-:::::::•···
Spiral ramp, adjacent up and
ctown Ian••
Source: Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Data. ~ ed.
Oxford: Blackwel/ Science Ltd, 2000.
r
Chapter 8: TRANSPORTATION FACILlalES
G. JEEPNEY TERMINALS
1.
Jffpne-t Oimensk>ns
3. Requirement for Public Transportation (BP 344)
"Jeepneys shall have at least 2 seats preferably the front
seats as designated seats for disabled persons." - BP 3
44
Rule IV
4. LTFRB Guidelines for Public Transport Terminals
(Memorandum Circular 2008--013)
The owner/operator of jeepney terminals shall
r
f-.lc1;._ht
l
0
install/provide the following:
•
with backrests for waiting passengers
•
Availability of information and passenger assistance
counters or personnel
•
Appropriate and adequate signages
•
Sufficient number of security personnel for the
protection of passengers from abusive vendors,
seating space should be provided for each passenger.
pickpockets, and other lawless elements and for the
proper inspection of baggages
Average width = 1.8 meters
•
Priority lanes for persons with special needs
specifically pregnant women, mothers travelling with
Average height = 2.1 meters
Source: Bacero, Riches ond Kori Verge/. Assessment of Jeepney in Metro
Manila for the Development of Specifications and Standards
2. Parking Slot Requirement
Roofing that would provide sufficient shade to
passengers from heat of the sun or rain
•
Seating
20
22
24
26
Capacity
7.45
6.75
7.10
Length (meters) 6.40
•Based on LTO Regulations, a minimum of 350 mm wide
Adequate and comfortable benches and/or seats
infants and/or small children, and those with physical
disabilities
t
"A jeepney or shuttle parking/loading/unloading slot muS be
computed at a minimum of 3 meters by 9 meters." -PD
Rule VII
1096
Review Module on Architectural Deeign
tt BUS TERMINALS
1. Typiul Bu O men Ions
(M morandum Clrculer 2008-013)
"
• •
••♦~..: : : : /: . ·. · : : . • . · :. · : : ,:
• ; ; : : :: : ..
..· :• • :
:
:
: ::
. ·: . : . · : : : .· : : .·
s ~ public -.nice bus
.
.. . . . . . . . . . . .
................... ::::::::::::.
12 00
Turning Radius of Buses = 12.8 meters
rd
Soorce: Neuf-ert..Emst o~Peter. Architect's Data. 3 ed. Oxford:
z.
rK1ng s1ot 01mens1ons
ockweUScienceL~,2
.
d
• A bus parking/loading/unloading slot must be compute at a
minimum of 3.6 meters by 12 meters." - PD 1096 Rule VII
3. Requirement for Public Transportation (BP 344)
•
•
Regular buses - 5 seats for disabled
.
d"f oned buses - 4 seats
First class, premiere, and air-con 1 1
for d isabled
For bu t rmlndl whl h Cdter to I •s thon V hide
typ s one of which would b PUB, th
own r/operntor of such t rmlnals shall
Install/provide the following:
• Adequate and comfortabl benches and/or seats
with backrests for waiting p ssengers
• Concrete pavement ;ind flooring
• Roofing that would provide sufficient shade to
passengers from heat of the sun or rain
• Wide entrances and exits for easy mobility to and
from the terminal
• Communication facilities such as telephone, fax
machines, Internet, etc.
• Public address system facilities and CCTV
cameras/monitors
• Information and passenger assistance counters
• Appropriate and adequate signages
• Sufficient number of security personnel for the
protection of passengers from abusive vendors,
pickpockets, and other lawless elements and for
the proper inspection of baggages
•
Separate restrooms for male, female, and
disabled passengers which must, at all times, be
clean, sufficiently lighted, foul odor-free,
ventilated, with clean running water, flush
system, toilet seat with cover, lavatory, waste
4-llFRB Guidelines for Public Transport Terminals
----
Review Moc:lule on ArGhrtactural Deelgn
iii.1111111
Chapter 8 : TRANSPORiA ilON
bin, toil t pap r mirror d'
,
' ispenser With soap
h nd dry r dry fl
·
•
.
V ' . oonng, functional door 1ock and
1ar11ton a maintenance personnel
,
•
•
Pnority lanes for persons with sp
.
ec1a1needs
specifically pregnant women moth
.
,
ers travelling
with infants and/or small children, and th ose with
.
physical disabilit ies
FACJLliU::e
Inter-city Bus Terminal
is usually located in the down town core
accessible directly by local bus, taxi, and other
vehicles. This type of t erminal includes long haul
.
d rovides greater
or package express services an P
number of bus movement s
•
Urban Suburban Commuter Terminal
Is a passenger collection and dist ribution center
or a rapid transit feeder station . It is
characterized by a diversified bus route and high
b. For inter-modal transport terminal which can
accommodate/ serve at least 3 types of vehicles (such
turnover commuter type bus operations
as PUBs, PUJs, taxicabs, multi-cabs, vans/AUVs, etc),
•
the owner/operator of such terminals shall
Airport-City Terminal
Is primarily intended for the transport of airline
install/provide all the requirements for bus terminals
passengers from the urban center to the major
with the addit ion of the following:
airports it is serving. The t erminal is accessible by
•
local transit system, taxis, and other vehicles. It is
•
Separate and sufficient parking slot/spaces for
each mode of transport
well informed of the departing and arriving f lights
Diaper-changing tables inside the female
including the pre-ticketing and check-in facilities.
restrooms for female passengers travelling with
infants/babies
•
Suburban Inter-province Terminal
~~
- Is a peripheral type designed to avoid t raffic
--=j
congestions. It is sometimes ref erred to as park
and ride terminal because t he access is primarily
S. Types of Bus Termfnals
.
th
Bus Terminals are classified according to e following
categories:
served by privat e vehicles. This type of term inal is
usually a one-storey building of simple
construct ions
I
Pl,ann'"- ConsJdPratfons
6.
Chapter 8 : TRANSPORTATION FACILl-rJES
The functional organizat ion 0 f
•
Srte nd location
•
Area nd shape of the lot
•
•
b
a us ter · .
minal rs governed by:
o lume and type 0 f b
us operations
Passengers and bus traffic .
I .
crrcu atron
With respect to the Airport-City bus T
.
.
.
ermrnal, the prima
cons,derahons are:
ry
•
•
Provisions for efficient check-in facilities
~ggage handling
•
flight information
•
Extensive counter space that includes weigh-in
i.
Type of platform loading to be used on the bus
terminal will depend on the site configuration, space
availability, size of bus, and the number of buses to
be accommodated
Parallel Loading
This type of platform loading requires larger
amount of space and buses have to wait until
after the first bus exits
Large terminals requires overpass or underpass
pedestrian to protect the passengers from
crossing the lanes
r
Bus
J I__..
provisions and conveyors for easy handling of
baggages
•
Provisions for car and taxi access
7. Space Requirements for a Sus Terminal
Bus Platform Loading Area
a.
and Driveway
The physical dimensions and maneuverability of the
bus determine the measurement of the width of the
· and
driveway, shape of the platform, column spacing,
vertical clearances
Source: Fajardo, Mox. Planning ond Designers Handbook.
Quezon City: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
z>d
ed.
ii.
Chapter 8: TRANSPORi'A
Right Angle loading
This type of platform loading w ·II b .
. .
1
ring d1ff1culty
bus maneuvering
•
,ION FACILl'TU:'.S
. .
re lot is comparatively
Is proven to be effrc,ent whe
,n
[)[
J~
--~1c.-c~
J:c= =i1a
/
.=.=
::
ff ,'
/ ,.,. - ~
~r----b
I/
I
.,. - ~
ff! /,,,.",/
:: ,
,, /
:;
:; I
I I
.01' 1
I 1
;:•
65~
/ c ~
f,/1 _ ,'t
I/
. :.;. , 2 o I , so ,
::
for side loading
I.
/ / ,,
::1
narrow and deep
th loading
. ct approach to e b
The passenger has a d ,re
door and baggage truck can op erate between uses
,'
7
-
-
I►
,a.o - -;
3(t0
/
- 35.0 --
Source: Neufert, Ernst and
Peter. Architect's Data. 3'd
ed. Oxford: Blackwell
Science Ltd, '2000.
Source: Fajardo, Max.
Planning and Designers
Handbook. z>d ed. Quezon
City: 5138 Merchandising,
1996.
19.8
Il
- 300
IIUS
--- 198-- - -1
7.«) ....
iii.
I
Straight Sawtooth Loading
Review Module on Architectural Deeign
R di I
Wtooth Load·
1ng
I consid red th
Chapter 8: TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES
~;~~r:~~i~~t
:idd~ng that onl;
~Pe of platform
pace a t the rear er . nunurn front The
maneuvering of the bu~ rn1ts an easy
E IT
~
No. of waiting seats = Capacity of bus x No. of loading docks
,...._.------:r-.____
I
---t-
Aterminal with 8 loading dock platforms for buses
each with capacity of 38 passengers would require
101 waiting seats.
3
EXIT
No. of waiting seats = 38 x 8 = 101
3
15.00m.
Min.
TERMINAL
ENTRY
t
RADIAL SAWTOOTH
~
Source: Fajardo, Max. Planning and Designers Handbook. 2 ed. Quezon
Qty: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
b Public Seating/ Passenger Waiting Area
.
"bl to the concourse area
- Should be directly access, e
.
h baskets,
and provided with drinking fountain, tras
and clocks
.d one seat for every
For an inter-city terminal, provi e
rs is calculated
ber of passenge
3 passengers. The num
of loading docks by an .
by multiplying the number
35 to 38 people. Ex.
·ty of between
average bus capac
c. Ticketing Facilities
- New concept of terminal ticketing facility is the open
counters in contrast with the old caged window
- ~ticket selling station should be provided for each
25 to 30 waiting room seats. However, the number
may vary depending on the operation policy of the
bus terminal
- The oath of the counter space depends on the
individual carrier operation and the ticketing
equipment used which varies from 0.90 to 1.50
meters per station, or 4.50 to 5.50 square meters in
terms of area. Counter height is usually 1.05 meters.
d. Baggage Room
Bagage rooms must have an area of about 10% of
the building area or contain about 4.50 square
meters for each bus loading dock or whichever Is
higher
It shall be accessible to both the public and concourse
equipped with standard metal racks about 4 or 5 tiers
for baggage storage
RsvieW Module on Architectural De&lgn
ro m s
functionin::i:~mes used for
ncours t ra ft1ic out
ffi e controls all b
uses mov
Concourse to have
.
ements and
d , doc s.
a direct observation
e could be fro m 4 5
. to 14 square meters.
loc
e
Pub
te
i als require an ad .
type Th
. min office space regardless
. . ~ area requ ired however depends upon
l)e and size of the terminal
enities
The terminat should provide facilities such as public
o lets e ephone booths, and snack bars
Par ·
Area
The par ing area should minimize walking distance to
the terminal provided with a covered walk
connecting it to the terminal building.
The in and out movement of the parking area should
avoid traff-.c congestions along the adjacent arteries
and should provide safety especially to th e
passengers
Chapter 8 : TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES
I.
AIRPORTS
1. Introduction
The design of airports is a study in the complex,
multidimensional spatial and temporal movement and flow of
aircraft, surface vehicles, passengers and their baggage,
serv'ice an d operational personnel, and cargo. It is also a
st udy in th e aesthetics and symbolism of urban and
architectural form.
The most efficient plan for the airport as a whole is that
which provides the required capacity for aircraft, passenger,
cargo and vehicle movements, with maximum passenger,
operator and staff convenience and at lowest capital and
operating costs. Flexibility and expansibility should also be
considered.
The airport is basically composed of the air side
development and the land side development. The air side
development is composed of runways and taxiways, aprons,
and navigation/traffic control aids. The land side
development includes the passenger building, cargo/baggage
facilities, parking area, and other facilities.
2. Runways and Taxiways
A runway ls defined as a rectangular area on a land
prepared for the landing and takeoff of aircraft while a
taxiway Is a path on an airport connecting runways with
ramps, hangars, terminals and other facilities
Apron
An
ron,
Chapter 8 : TRANSPORTATION FACILlilE5
~
e-d
n a1rs1d area
~ommod t~
•re ft for Purp0se f I ~n an airport to
so oading
I
~s~n rs,
,I or c
o, fu llin
.
or un oading
•
u
&. Parking or ma·1"t
'
·• enance
rs in Apron Planning
r
O
ure
•
•
ircraft stands req ·
u1red at present and in
A1ro-aft m · , both present and future
rcraft d imensions and
.
-
-
maneuvering capabilities
-
l
~-I§ ;z -~-~.::"'
F50
1
-
,.,
.727-200
'T
;\
'
\~
"\
j
I
t -
1 ' - - - - --
__;.1'0 .c..
6 _ __
- -
\
.-7 33
- 4
_,
-t
■7157 -200
DC-1ot30
Source: Neufert, Ernst and Peter. Architect's Data. 3 rd ed.
Oxford: Blackwell Science Ltd, 2000.
►
•
Aircraft parking
configurations
Chapter 8: TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES
•
Method of aircraft guidance onto the aircraft stand
•
Aircraft ground servicing requirements
•
Taxiways and service roads
b. Apron-terminal Relationship
•
N05E-IN
Simple Concept
may be applied for low traffic volume airports.
ANC LEO NOS!!-lN
Aircraft are normally parked w ithin angled nosein or nose-out for self taxi-in or taxi-out.
,,,,
~
,,
PARALLEL
ANGLED NOSE-OUT
7/)'//7//m7/ff//'7m)'//////m»?»7J7Jl/ll?Tllm7/lT//l/ll7/l1
•
.
b t
dearance requirement e wee
~
•1
I\
a) Simple concept
■UIUJING LINE
Source: International Civil Aviation Organization. Airport Planning Manual.
I
/
II
II
1987
ed.
·
Source: International Ovil Aviation Organization.
Airport Planning Manual. zld ed. 1987.
n two aircrafts and
between an aircraft and the terminal building
~ew Module on Archrtectural De&Aen
t
•
linear Concept
Aircraft are parked
.
1
building in a line
a ongs,de the terminal
next t o one a
h
parallel, or d1agon I
..
not er in nose-in
a Pos1t1on s Th
'
position determines th
. e parking
terminal
e overall length of the
Chapter 8 : TRANSPORTATION FACIUTIES
nu
II I
IJ II
D II
IJ II
U II
IJ II
II II
ID
l~D
I~ II
I~ II
Source: International Civil Aviation Organization.
Airport Planning Manual. z"' ed. 1987.
•
Satellite Concept
One or more buildings, each surrounded radially
with aircraft parking places, are connected to the
~rce: International Civil Aviation Organization.
A1rport Planning Manual. z>d ed. 1987.
•
main terminal, generally by large corridors
Pier I Finger Concept
Aircraft park on both sides of a pier connected to
the terminal building. Where there are two or
more piers, the space in between
d) Satellie concept
Source: International Civil Aviation Organization
Airport Planning Manual. z"' ed. 1987_
·
------------------------::---:---:-:--:-:---:-~-------Review Module on Architectural Deelgn
CCE\)
•
Tr nsporter Concept
Chapter 8 : TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES
a ircraft P rking is spatial! s
t rminal nd the pass
V eparated from the
engers are tak
from their flights by spec·
. en to and
vehicles
,a 11 V designed transport
IJ
l'I \
"''
I
I
I
I
I
, -- - - - _1
I
I
a
I
C:
a
n
II
IJ
~,
1) Hybrid conc:tpt
Source: International Civil Aviation Organization.
Airport Planning Manual. z>d ed. 1987.
4. Navigation and Traffic Control Aids
e) Transl)Orter (open apron) concept
Source: lntemational Civil Aviation Organization.
Airport Planning Manual. zrd ed. 1987.
Includes the airport control tower and offices for visual
and navigation aids, search and rescue services, and
communication services
S. Passenger Building
•
Hybrid Concept
.
Mixed variations can be developed from the basic
layouts
The passenger building houses the facilities to
accommodate the activities associated with the transfer of
passengers and their baggage from the point of ground
transportation to the point of connection with the aircraft,
and with the transfer of connecting and in-transit passengers
and their baggage between flights.
CCE\>
tp
n
Pf
h
Th
for bu 1n
n t,
ri
fo
us
Chapter 8 : TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES
of p
asse ngers are those
nd those Who travel
Who travel for tourism
ons. Airports having a
,
•
,:t~f non-trav lling visitors must provide
rist
P ss nge r build ing so as not t
.
o
· e Primary
0f
Pas ngers are:
Ord rly Oow of Passengers Th
•
•
In ern
IOn 1- passengers t ravelling between
COtJnt ries and su6ject to inspect· b
ion Ygovernment
ron , cont rol age ncies
•
country o r st a te and not subject to government
co t rot inspection
Further categories which apply to both aircraft and
•
re the foUowing:
~ artlng - passengers usi ng a n a irport for the
p urpose of departing fro m it by air
•
b. Size of Passenger Building
Building sizes for small to medium passenger
buildings will be roughly 5,000 square meters up to
10,000 square meters. These building sizes correspond to
approximately 500,000 to 1,000,000 passengers both
ways annually.
c. Building Level Concept
Arrtvmg - passengers arriving by aircraft at an airport
and not de parting by a continuing or connecting flight
•
General Aviation and Air Taxies - passengers in civil
aviation operations other than scheduled air services
and non-scheduled air transport operations for
remuneration or hire.
Domest ic - passengers trave lling on routes which
m and end w ith in the boundaries of a single
a..'!i,'!il"rw prs
Transfer - passenger arriving at an airport to connect
with a flight for another destination. The flow route
for transfer passengers depends on whether the
tra nsfer is between flights of the same or different
categories, i.e. domest ic to domestic, international,
to international, or between international and
domestic
Tr nsit - passenge rs w ho arrive and leave again on
the same aircraft. Transit passengers stay at th e
airport onty fo r t h e duration of a ircraft turnaround
and have no requirements beyond those of arriving
In order to enhance the smooth movement of
passengers and to facilitate the various functions of the
terminal building, it is necessary to separate the
enplaning passengers from the deplaning passengers as
well as their baggage. Separation can be done by a one
level or two level concepts.
- -~and
~:de~pa~rt~ing~~
pa~s~se~ng~e:r~
s._ _ _ _ __ __ _ _ __ _R~~~~~~~~~~:;~~~;-111
------_
Review Module on Architectural Deelgn
Chapter 8 : TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES
•
•n I level ro,td/ tn I
-level terminal
P rture proces . .
I d
t
sing in the t
me level but .
errnlnal
is separated
hor ontal p
. assenger boardin
.
ea of stairs
g to aircraft is by
mv I n
,I
b) slnale level road/ double lc:Yel terminal
Source: International Civil Aviation Organization.
Airport Planning Manual. 2nd ed. 1987.
,a) ·. . -
~ roadlsin&le leYel terminal
•
Source: International Civil Aviation Organization.
Airport Planning Manual. 2nd ed. 1987.
•
Double-level road/double-level terminal
access roads and curb-side are on different
levels, to allow vertical separation of arrival
and departure processing in the terminal
(usually, the upper level is for departure and
the lower level for arrival)
Single -level road/ double-level terminal
Arrival and departure processing in the
terminal is normally at grade (road level) with
departure lounges on a higher level,
permitting the use of passenger loading
brJdges or of transporters with level change
capabilities
~+-1>-,-=-◄:z. .__.,..F?-.-- 6-~--.-..-.-..-,,.-.-..-..-~-dd►~
...,-:....:....., . . ,....
~ , , ..~
....
c) double level road/double level terminal
Source: International Civil Aviation Organization.
Airport Planning Manual. ~ ed. 1987.
---•
Single-level roads/double-level terminal
This is a variation of double-level road/doublelevel terminal, with access road and curb-side for
arri" a l a nd depa
ure ho ·
vertically
nzontally but not
Chapter 8 : TRANSPORTA 1ION FACIL111ES
The peak hour passenger figure can be calculated as
follows:
d)
""'I.le le\
fa.ch/.......L L
•
•
Loading factor assumed to be at 70%
Biggest capacity plane that can be
accommodated in the airport, say 8737 with 150
seats (all economy seats)
• Assuming only one 8737 is expected to arrive and
depart within the peak hour (no other plane is
expected)
' -~•
'°""'-"'""-'lermiQal
Source:
International Civil Av·10t 10n
· Orga • .
•
Airport Planning Manual ..,,,, d
n1zat1on.
•L
e . 1987.
•
Bu ilding Floor Area and Peak Ho ur Passenger
Passenger building sized are based on the peak
•
•
If another plane is expected to arrive and depart
within the same peak hour, calculate the figures
for that plane and add up to the original figure
To calculate for the floor area of the passenger building
for the above example:
hour passengers. In the Philippines, a unit floor area of 10
square meters per peak hour passenger is used for many
domestic a irport projects
Desired Passenger Tennlnal Building Floor Area per
Airports
Peak Hour Passenger
Domestic
Building
(sqm/pax)
NAIA, Clark, Cebu
Other International
Airports
Principal Airports
15
10
10
150 passengers x 2 (arriving and departing within the
hour) x 0 .70 (loading factor) x 10 (from above) =
2,100 sqm.
lsqm/pax)
30
15
-
Source: Japan International Cooperation Agency Study Team
---
•
International
Building
-
Peak hour passenger: 150 x 2 x 0 .70 = 210
•
Passenger Building Facilities
i.
Curbside Area (Departure Curb & Arrival Curb)
Functions as a sidewalk for pedestrians and
baggage loading/unloading area
(Note: may vary depending on characteristics of airports, such as
Usually the length of the building ls enough for
tourist or business airports)
the curbside \ength, but in case where the length
Review Module on Architectural Dee~n
....----......
eon o t I nd
a Parkin
tro w,11 ~
g or sorne kind
necessary
ou e
gt is usual!
he curb
y deterrnined by
p
affected by th
e nurnbe
c ractenstics of th
r, average
.
e ve hicles
e nng la
es, Used for load·
passe gers . h
•ng and
ith le
Wrt bags, should be
w
f\gth ao d Width that coud
a e traffic u.-..1
•v umes at peak pe · d
del
. .
no s
ay. The dth of the mane uvering
Chapter 8 : TRANSPORTATION FACILITIES
transportation facilities should be provided for
the arriving passengers. Facilities for car rental,
hotel reservations and money exchange should
also be available.
lS
C
shou
a
be 1.6 t i es the regular traffic lane
a wa rng period of 3 minutes for cars is
t for loading/unloading will promote an
· nt traffic flow
ic Co
•
Depa
o rse
r e Concourse - the a rea between the
entra
iii.
Departure Area
• Check-in Hall
The space in between the check-in counters and
the queuing spaces is the check-in hall. This area
is closed to non-passenger public for facilitation
of the check-in procedure and security. It should
be designed so that the airline counters are
clearly visible immediately upon entering the
passenger building. Provision for seating in this
area of the building should be minimum or none
to avoid congestions
•
Security Check- mandatory for passengers with
check-in baggage for both domestic and
international. The location of the security
checkpoints should also be visible from the pubric
ce and the check-in hall. It is
where friends and family members await for the
passengers to comp&ete the check-in procedure
Of
•
the custom s dearance and come out to see
· the concourse
between the
A,rrival eoncourse - the area
nd the baggage claim hall.
. .ng e ntrances a
waiting area for
ovides a short term
This area pr
together with a
. .ng passengers
the greeters await•
ation and ground
. I t ing area. Inform
separate orcu a
•
concourse
Queuing Area - the space should be sufficient to
provide free access to passengers checking in and
other facilities. For small and medium size
airports, a depth of 10 meters should be
adequate for the check-in queuing
~ Module on ArchiUctural Dseign
Chapter 8 : TRANSPOR•A •ffO
•
N FACILrrlES
I
I
Check-in counters t he
b
..
.
num er of check-in
pos1t1ons required is a fu r
.
nc ion of time required
to process one passenger and th
e total passeng
figure of the peak hour - on
er
.
.
e way. Average
process_rng time per passenger Is 2 minutes.
Processing for checking-in per fl",g ht usually 1
.s
I
Government Frontier Controls
iv.
I
t ol for departure
The location of governmenta I con r
d the
should be located between the check-in area an
I
I
I
I
I
airside waiting area
•
Immigration and Police (for international
•
minutes to process. Dividing the t ime by 60
passengers)
· ht fter
Security Inspection - should be locate d ng a
the passport control. Small search rooms may be
minutes, you will have to provide 7 or more
needed to be used by national security police or
counters. A 10% a lowance Js usually added.
immigrat ion inspectors. Inspection prior to
Linear counters are the most frequently used
departure lounge gets more severe and
configuration. Business or first class check-in is
thorough. Some passengers have to take off their
around one hour. So, if there are are 210
passengers on a peak hour, it will take them 420
usually separated from regular check-in.
shoes, belts, watch, and cellphones to have them
o
checked by the x-ray machine.
Aircraft Operator's Ticket Sales, Standby
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Registration, and Information - should be
located clear of the primary flow streams
o
Departure Hall/Gate Lounge
V.
•
Airline Offices - support offices are required
I
Passenger Lounge Area - comprises seating,
I
I
I
I
I
I
processing, and circulation areas
in close proximity of the check-in counters
and should be in the airside concourses close
I
I
I
I
•
Common departure lounge - should be provided
to accommodate originating passengers who
to their aircraft operational areas
have checked in earty and have cleared
o Currency Exchange
o Cashier - for passengers who have excess
governmental controls but await their boarding
gate details. The lounge should have adequate
seating
baggage
o Airport Tax or Passenger Service Charge
•
Airline OP lounges- one of the ma or attractions
for the first cla_ss or b~lness class pa-ssencers. In
case of small to medium airparts, it would be
------------------------:::---:-:----------on
Review Modu '49
Arc h~ctura l Deelgn
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
t
•
reasonable t o Prepare
.hb
one or two
w it
everage se rv·
srna11 roorns
.
ices, cloak ro
.
se rvices, and comf
orn, intern et
ort rooms.
Ot her amen it ies
Chapter 8 : TRANSPOR:fATION FACILITIES
Flight information d' I
Isp ays
Information desks
Restaurants and bars
T I OII
Shops including duty free shops
Currency exchange post tt·
,
o Ice,and
telephone
-
..':"t-rrr
,.~"~
Toilet facilities
Public address system
Recommended Gate Lounge Sizes
Aircraft Type
8-747
l-1011
DC-10
82702
DC-8
8-707
8-737
8-727
DC-9
Area Sq.M.
558
372
372
372
326
326
186
186
140
-- ... ...,.._ ,
vi.
Boarding Area
The connecting area between the passenger buildtng
and the aircraft
•
Boarding gates - passenger processing area
•
Airside Corridor - the walkway betwt!en the
departure lounges and aircraft gate pocsltions.
shoutd be 2.5 to 3 meten
a.
-rRANSPOR"fA"flON FACIL.rrn~s -
Cha~rc;..,:
--
d
rt storing space
space. Where carts are use ' ca
A number of different systems ca n connect the
passenger building to the aircraft. Th ese me
. ude
1
passengers having to (1) walk up boa rd"mg stairs
. or
must be added.
•
(~~ w~lk along a passenger boarding bridge or (3)
Customs Check (for international)
nsrng ,n a transporter. The routes may be over the
apron, through enclosed routes at or below apron
Domestic Passenger Flow
level, or at passenger building and aircraft floor
levels.
vii.
Arriva l Area
From the aircraft exits, passengers come through the
boarding bridges, the air side corridor and to the
Trans,t/ Transter
r
Waltlng/V'aa
governmental control areas where quarantine and
passport controls are performed.
•
Government Frontier Controls (for international)
For small to medium size airports, the queuing
length should be round 10 to 15 meters. The
~departln I..C)IIIQle
Passengers
IIIRSIDE
-- ---
_l
7
Baggage Claim
Section
D
number of immigration inspection should be
calculated
L...,_.,I!
in relation to the peak hour
passengers one way. There are more immigration
counters at arrival area than in the departure
Concourse
Curtaide
area as the surge in passengers is faster, having
all arrived at the same time.
•
Baggage Claim
The baggage claim hall, as well as other
functional areas, must have enough circulation
---------- - - -- --;:::::;:;:~~~~~=-Review Module on Architectural Deeign
Ir
Chapter 8 : TRANSPORTATION FACILl11E.5
ticket counter to the central baggage ro om · After being
checked-in, baggage must be sorted into flight grou~s,
then further sorted into subgroups (such as deSt inat ,on
.
airports,
transfer baggage, and/or t he particular aircraft
holds). Except for the smallest airports, t his is best
achieved by handling on a separate floor below the
passenger departure floo r.
•
Arrival Baggage Flow
After arrival at the passenger building, baggage
has to be unloaded from vehicles and containers and
delivered to the baggage claim system or transferred to
the departures area in the case of transit and transfer
passengers.
•
Curt>~
--------
f. Sagage Processing
The ttrm •baggage flow" refers to the baggage handling
separated from passengers. Flow routes should not be in
co.n flict wrth the passenger or vehicular flows.
•
Departure Baggage Flow
Baggage Claim
As passenger flow rates and aircraft sizes
increase, baggage claim systems should be arranged to
eliminate milling; this can be achieved by having
passengers remain in the principal flow streams and their
baggage presented to them on equipment arranged in
the line of flow. For high flow rates, reduction in milling
can be realized by presenting baggage on a moving
display, such as revolving turntable or belt, which passes
in front of passengers.
Baggage checked-in coincides with the usual
t.cket counter check-in. It is cuSt omary to provide
mechanization from an area directly in the back of the
----
Review Module on Architectural Design
r
The t'ime to claim all th b
8737 ircraft u u lly tak
e aggage from one sa
es 15 mi nutes ft
' Y
waiting. That means if th
a e r 15 minutes of
e succeedi
.
th a irport 30 minutes aft
ng aircraft arrives at
e r t he fi rst ·
pas e ers of th
aircraft, the
e next can claim th b
sa e device used by t he fi
.
e aggage using the
irst aircraft passengers.
•
private cars, taxis and buses. Allocation of adequate spaces
for their parking must be planned.
Based on the practice in previous projects in the
Philippines, a value of 0.5 slots per peak hour passenger is
used. This includes employees, greeters, and visitors.
Customs Check
At various international airports
from baggage cla im to customs baggag ' _Passen~er flow
e inspection.
•
Chapter 8: TRAN5POR1A1ION FACILltlES
Tra sfer Baggage
h. Other Facilities
These facilities are common to airports, regardless of
traffic volumes:
•
•
Public toilets
Airport management offices
inspection and their baggage is, therefore, treated as
•
•
•
Airport police/security offices
Medical aid facilities
Traveler's aid
norma l arrivals baggage and delivered to the baggage
•
Building maintenance and storage
claim area of the international arrival area. This also
•
Building mechanical systems (HVAC)
applies to transit passengers on flights changing category.
•
Building structure
•
Circulation
•
Information, public address sytem, flight information,
signs and graphics, courtesy phones, and security alarm
system
parlcing may be categorized into three categories of users -
•
Government offices like OWWA for overseas workers
passengers, commercials, and employees. It can also be
•
Contract service facilities
categorized based on the kinds of vehicles, such as the
•
Letter post
Pa ssengers transferring between international
flights should not claim their baggage until they reach
fin a l de st ination. Passengers transferring from
internat ional to domestic flights are usually to customs
g. Parking Areas
Main access mode is in most cases automobiles. Vehice
--------------------------- -------~Re;:v:i1:e:w:-;:M;,o:c::l~u~l~e~o:n~A~r:c~h~rte;::ct~u:r:a~I;D~e:e:ii:g:n:lB
\
-
REFERENCES
OOKS
Am nc n p nmn
ociation Stei
nd ons Inc.• 2006.
8
a-C sono,
De ch·
'
ner, Frederick and Kent But\
v
ne Edraline The
.
rsuo/ Handbook on Phi/i
J
,ara, oseph and Michael Crosbie
FaJardo,
e
n
.
.
er. Plann,ng and Urban Design Standards. Student Edition. New Jersey: John Wiley
in
. .
.
.
PP e Bu,/d,ng & Design Lows. Center for the Designed Environment Professions, 2013 .
· •me Saver Stand d f,
. .
or s or Bu,ldmg Types. 4th ed. McGraw-Hill, 2001.
Planning and Designers Handbook
ert. Ernst and Peter. Architect' o
s ata. 3
rd
nd
.
· 2 ed. Quezon City: 5138 Merchandising, 1996.
ed. Oxford: Blackwell Science Ltd, 2000.
Ramse , Charles Geo rge and Harold Slee er A h.
·
P · re ltectura/ Graphic Standards. Student Edition. New Jersey: John Wiley and Sons Inc., 2008.
COOES, GUIDELINES, & MANUALS
In emational Crvil Aviation Organization. Airport Planning Manual. 2nd ed. 1987
Republic of the Philippines. Batas Pambansa Big. 220: Standards for Economic and Socialized Housing Projects and its Implementing Revised Rules
and Regulations.
Repub
re of the Philippines. Batas Pambansa Big. 344: The Law to Enhance Mobility of Disabled Persons and its Implementing Rules and Regulations.
Republic of the Philippines. Department of Education. Ed~cation Facilities Manual: Revised Edition of 2007 Handbook of Educational Facilities_
Integrating Disaster Risk Reduction in School Construction. 2010.
H Ith Guidelines in the Planning and Design of a Hospital and Other Health Facilities. November 2004.
epub ic of the Philipp ines. Department o f ea ·
~ew Module on Archltectural Design
~
Republic of the Philippines D
. epartrnent
Resorts, Pension Houses, and Ot
REFERENCES
ofTourisrn. Rules and Re
her Accommodati
E
.
.
gulat,ons to Govern the Accreditation of Hotels, tourist Inns, Motels, Apartels,
. of the Ph1hppines
..
on stabl1shments.
Republic
D
· epartrnent f
.
o Tounsrn. Natio
. of the Philippines. Land T
nal Accommodation Standards ·· Hotels ·
Republic
.
"d ,. th
ransportat1on and F
..
Gut e mes tn
e Establishment, Ma,·ntenonce and oranchi 5.1ng Regulatory Board. Memorandum Circular 2008-013: Standard Classification a
Republic of the Philippines. Presidential
Regulations.
Perat,ons of Public Transport Terminals
0
ecree
Republic of the Philippines. Presidential o
Rules and Regulattons.
.
ecree
1096
: The National Building Code of the Philippines and its Implementing Revised Rules and
957· Th
·
• •.
·
e Subd1v1s1on and Condominium Buyer's Protective Decree and its Implementing Revised
Republic of the Philippines. Republic Act 1378: The Revised National Plumbing Code of the Philippines.
Republic of the Philippines. Republic Act 9514: Fire Code of the Philippines of 2008 and its Implementing Rules and Regulations.
RESEARCH PAPER
Bacero, Riches and Karl Vergel. Assessment o11eepneys ;n Metro Manila for the Development of Specifications and Standards. 2010.
co.ROM
.
I G hie Standards. CO-ROM. New York, 2008.
Ramsey, Charles George and Harold Sleeper. Arch1tectura rap
-
nd
~
Module on Archtuctural Design